304
SVQs in Furniture

SVQs in Furniture - SQA · SVQs in Furniture 1 November 2010 Introduction Section 1 of this document provides details of the SVQ structures for Furniture at levels 2 and 3

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

SVQs in Furniture

Table of Contents Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................1

Section 1: SVQ Structures .......................................................................................................................2

Section 2: Evidence Requirements ...................................................................................................... 10

Section 3: Units making up the SVQs .................................................................................................. 11

Unit 201: Prepare and assemble furniture using mechanical fixings .................................................. 12

Unit 203: Join and joint veneers .......................................................................................................... 17

Unit 204: Lay veneers ......................................................................................................................... 21

Unit 205: Attach fittings to furniture ..................................................................................................... 25

Unit 206: Prepare to apply finishing processes to production furniture .............................................. 29

Unit 207: Apply finishing processes to production furniture ................................................................ 33

Unit 209: Assist with the operation of furniture production machinery ................................................ 37

Unit 210: Prepare to upholster standard items of modern furniture .................................................... 41

Unit 211: Upholster standard items of modern furniture ..................................................................... 46

Unit 212: Prepare fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings and/or upholstery .................. 50

Unit 213: Cut fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings and/or upholstery ......................... 54

Unit 214: Produce simple seamed components by hand and machine .............................................. 58

Unit 215: Produce standard window treatments ................................................................................. 62

Unit 216: Produce workshop equipment ............................................................................................. 67

Unit 217: Make and assemble wooden components of hand-crafted furniture .................................. 71

Unit 218: Match, measure and mark out veneers ............................................................................... 76

Unit 219: Lay veneers by hand and press methods ........................................................................... 80

Unit 220: Apply stains, sealers and primers........................................................................................ 84

Unit 221: Prepare hand-crafted furniture for finishing ......................................................................... 88

Unit 228: Set up and operate woodworking machinery ...................................................................... 92

Unit 229: Prepare and construct upholstery foundations .................................................................... 97

Unit 230: Produce complex seamed components ............................................................................ 101

Unit 231: Make sure your own actions reduce risks to heal and safety (HSS1) ............................... 105

Unit 235: Finish furniture by hand spray gun .................................................................................... 110

Unit 236: Maintain tools and equipment used in furniture making and installation ........................... 114

Unit 237: Prepare resources for use in making hand-crafted furniture ............................................. 118

Unit 239: Finish hand-crafted furniture .............................................................................................. 123

Unit 240: Upholster standard items of traditional furniture ................................................................ 127

Unit 241: Create decorative effects on hand-crafted furniture .......................................................... 131

Unit 247: Produce upholstery templates ........................................................................................... 135

Unit 248: Assess and repair items of furniture .................................................................................. 139

Unit 249: Work effectively in a furniture-related commercial environment ....................................... 143

Unit 250: Produce table treatments .................................................................................................. 147

Unit 251: Produce simple bed treatments ......................................................................................... 152

Unit 252: Produce scatter and bolster cushions and padded items ................................................. 157

Unit 253: Prepare fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings ............................................. 162

Unit 256: Cut fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings .................................................... 166

Unit 258: Produce loose covers ........................................................................................................ 170

Unit 301: Evaluate and develop own skills and expertise ................................................................. 176

Unit 302: Evaluate and specify requirements for making hand-crafted furniture and/or soft furnishings .................................................................................................................. 180

Unit 303: Evaluate and specify restoration requirements ................................................................. 186

Unit 304: Select, prepare and apply decorative veneers .................................................................. 190

Unit 305: Cut and assemble hand-crafted furniture .......................................................................... 197

Unit 307: Complete high specification hand-crafted furniture ........................................................... 202

Unit 310: Assemble loose covers ...................................................................................................... 206

Unit 311: Fit and finish top covers ..................................................................................................... 210

Unit 313: Produce cushions and/or bolsters and padded items ....................................................... 216

Unit 314: Install and dress soft furnishings ....................................................................................... 222

Unit 319: Replicate/restore wooden components of furniture ........................................................... 227

Unit 351: Improve process and quality control in a commercial environment .................................. 232

Unit 352: Define and develop standard operating procedures within the furniture, furnishings and interiors industry ......................................................................................................... 236

Unit 355: Produce and maintain jigs and templates ......................................................................... 240

Unit 357: Produce furniture design prototypes ................................................................................. 244

Unit 358: Produce furniture production specifications ...................................................................... 248

Unit 367: Construct upholstery foundations ...................................................................................... 251

Unit 370: Complete complex production furniture ............................................................................. 255

Unit 371: Collect and research information to support furniture restoration and repair commissions ...................................................................................................................... 262

Unit 373: Finish furniture by modern and traditional polishing .......................................................... 266

Unit 380: Monitor and maintain a healthy and safe working environment ........................................ 270

Unit 381: Produce advanced bed treatments to include producing a fitted valance and decorative bedspread ........................................................................................................ 275

Unit 382: Produce complex shaped cushions and padded items ..................................................... 280

Unit 383: Produce advanced loose covers ....................................................................................... 286

Unit 384: Produce and install advanced window treatments ............................................................ 292

Unit 387: Evaluate and specify requirements for making soft furnishings ........................................ 297

SVQs in Furniture 1 November 2010

Introduction

Section 1 of this document provides details of the SVQ structures for Furniture at levels 2 and 3. Section 2 outlines the evidence requirements for all Units and section 3 includes all the Units making up the SVQs at levels 2 and 3.

SVQs in Furniture 2 November 2010

Section 1: SVQ Structures

Furniture Making: Component Manufacture level 2 (Candidates must complete 3 Mandatory Units and 2 Optional Units) 231: Make sure your own actions reduce the risks to health and safety (ENTO HSS1)

249: Work effectively in a furniture-related commercial environment

228: Set up and operate woodworking machinery

Optional Units — two from the following: 206: Prepare to apply finishing processes to production furniture

207: Apply finishing processes to production furniture

209: Assist with the operation of furniture production machinery

216: Produce workshop equipment

217: Make and assemble wooden components of hand-crafted furniture

220: Apply stains, sealers and primers

221: Prepare hand-crafted furniture for finishing

235: Finish furniture by hand held spray gun

237: Prepare resources for use in making hand-crafted furniture

239: Finish hand-crafted furniture

Furniture Making: Traditional level 2 (Candidates must complete four Mandatory Units and two Optional Units) 231: Make sure your own actions reduce the risks to health and safety (ENTO HSS1)

249: Work effectively in a furniture-related commercial environment

217: Make and assemble wooden components of hand-crafted furniture

236: Maintain tools and equipment used in furniture making and installation

Optional Units — two from the following: 205: Attach fittings to furniture

206: Prepare to apply finishing processes to production furniture

207: Apply finishing processes to production furniture

216: Produce workshop equipment

221: Prepare hand-crafted furniture for finishing

228: Set up an operate woodworking machinery

237: Prepare resources for use in making hand-crafted furniture

SVQs in Furniture 3 November 2010

Furniture Making: Contemporary level 2 (Candidates must complete four Mandatory Units and two Optional Units) 231: Make sure your own actions reduce the risks to health and safety (ENTO HSS1)

249: Work effectively in a furniture-related commercial environment

201: Prepare and assemble furniture using mechanical fixings

236: Maintain tools and equipment used in furniture making and installation

Optional Units — two from the following: 203: Join and joint veneers

204: Lay veneers

205: Attach fittings to furniture

217: Make and assemble wooden components of hand-crafted furniture

218: Match, measure and mark out veneers

219: Lay veneers by hand and press methods

228: Set up an operate woodworking machinery

237: Prepare resources for use in making hand-crafted furniture

Upholstery and Soft Furnishings: Modern Upholstery level 2 (Complete six Units: four Mandatory Units and two Optional Units) Mandatory Units 231: Make sure your own actions reduce the risks to health and safety (ENTO HSS1)

249: Work effectively in a furniture-related commercial environment

210: Prepare to upholstery standard items of modern furniture

211: Upholster standard items of modern furniture

Optional Units — two from the following: 212: Prepare fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings and/or upholstery

213: Cut fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings and/or upholstery

214: Produce simple seamed components by hand and machine

229: Prepare and construct upholstery foundations

230: Produce complex seamed components

247: Produce upholstery templates

239: Finish hand-crafted furniture

SVQs in Furniture 4 November 2010

Upholstery and Soft Furnishings: Traditional Upholstery level 2

(Complete six Units: four Mandatory Units and two Optional Units) Mandatory Units 231: Make sure your own actions reduce the risks to health and safety (ENTO HSS1)

249: Work effectively in a furniture-related commercial environment

229: Prepare and construct upholstery foundations

240: Upholster standard items of traditional furniture

Optional Units — two from the following: 212: Prepare fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings and/or upholstery

213: Cut fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings and/or upholstery

214: Produce simple seamed components by hand and machine

230: Produce complex seamed components

239: Finish hand-crafted furniture

247: Produce upholstery templates

Upholstery and Soft Furnishings: Soft Furnishings level 2 (Complete six Units: four Mandatory Units and two Optional Units)

Mandatory Units

255: Make sure your own actions reduce risks to health and safety within a Furniture/Interiors-related workplace

249: Work effectively in a furniture-related commercial environment

253: Prepare fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings

215: Produce standard window treatments

Optional Units — two from the following:

256: Cut fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings

214: Produce simple seamed components by hand and machine

230: Produce complex seamed components

250: Produce table treatments

251: Produce simple bed treatments

252: Produce scatter and bolster cushions and padded items

258: Produce loose covers

SVQs in Furniture 5 November 2010

Finishing Furniture: Hand Finishing level 2

(Complete six Units: four Mandatory Units and two Optional Units) Mandatory Units 231: Make sure your own actions reduce the risks to health and safety (ENTO HSS1)

249: Work effectively in a furniture-related commercial environment

221: Prepare hand-crafted furniture for finishing

239: Finish hand-crafted furniture

Optional Units — two from the following: 204: Lay veneers

205: Attach fittings to furniture

220: Apply stains, sealers and primers

241: Create decorative effects on hand-crafted furniture

248: Assess and repair items of furniture

Finishing Furniture: Spray Finishing level 2 (Complete six Units: four Mandatory Units, and two Optional Units) Mandatory Units 231: Make sure your own actions reduce the risks to health and safety (ENTO HSS1)

249: Work effectively in a furniture-related commercial environment

206: Prepare to apply finishing processes to production furniture

235: Finish furniture by hand held spray gun

Optional Units — two from the following: 204: Lay veneers

205: Attach fittings to furniture

207: Apply finishing processes to production furniture

220: Apply stains, sealers and primers

241: Create decorative effects on hand-crafted furniture

248: Assess and repair items of furniture

SVQs in Furniture 6 November 2010

Furniture Making: Contemporary level 3

(Complete seven Units: four Mandatory Units and three Optional Units) Mandatory Units 301: Evaluate and develop own skills and expertise

351: Improve process and quality control in a commercial environment

380: Monitor and maintain a healthy and safe working environment

370: Complete complex production furniture

Optional Units — three from the following: 302: Evaluate and specify requirements for making hand-crafted furniture and/or soft

furnishings

304: Select, prepare and apply decorative veneers

305: Cut and assemble hand-crafted furniture

307: Complete high specification hand-crafted furniture

355: Produce and maintain jigs and templates

357: Produce furniture design prototypes

358: Produce furniture production specifications

373: Finish furniture by modern and traditional polishing

Furniture Making: Traditional level 3 (Complete seven Units: four Mandatory Units and three Optional Units) Mandatory Units 301: Evaluate and develop own skills and expertise

351: Improve process and quality control in a commercial environment

380: Monitor and maintain a healthy and safe working environment

307: Complete high specification hand-crafted furniture

Optional Units — three from the following: 302: Evaluate and specify requirements for making hand-crafted furniture and/or soft

furnishings

303: Evaluate and specify restoration requirements

304: Select, prepare and apply decorative veneers

305: Cut and assemble hand-crafted furniture

319: Replicate/restore wooden components of furniture

355: Produce and maintain jigs and templates

SVQs in Furniture 7 November 2010

371: Collect and research information to support furniture restoration and repair commissions

373: Finish furniture by modern and traditional polishing

SVQs in Furniture 8 November 2010

Upholstery and Soft Furnishings: Upholstery level 3

(Complete seven Units: four Mandatory Units and three Optional Units) Mandatory Units

301: Evaluate and develop own skills and expertise

351: Improve process and quality control in a commercial environment

380: Monitor and maintain a healthy and safe working environment

367: Construct upholstery foundations

Optional Units — three from the following: 302: Evaluate and specify requirements for making hand-crafted furniture and/or soft

Furnishings

310: Assemble loose covers

311: Fit and finish top covers

313: Produce cushions and/or bolsters and padded items

314: Install and dress soft furnishings

355: Produce and maintain jigs and templates

371: Collect and research information to support furniture restoration and repair commissions

373: Finish furniture by modern and traditional polishing

SVQs in Furniture 9 November 2010

Upholstery and Soft Furnishings: Soft Furnishings level 3 (Complete seven Units: four Mandatory Units and three Optional Units) Mandatory Units 301: Evaluate and develop own skills and expertise

351: Improve process and quality control in a commercial environment

380: Monitor and maintain a healthy and safe working environment

387: Evaluate and specify requirements for making soft furnishings

Optional Units — three from the following: 314: Install and dress soft furnishings

381: Produce advanced bed treatments to include producing a fitted valance and decorative bedspread

382: Produce complex shaped cushions and padded items

383: Produce advanced loose covers

384: Produce and install advanced window treatments

Finishing Furniture level 3 (Complete seven Units: four Mandatory Units and three Optional Units) Mandatory Units 301: Evaluate and develop own skills and expertise

351: Improve process and quality control in a commercial environment

380: Monitor and maintain a healthy and safe working environment

373: Finish furniture by modern and traditional polishing

Optional Units — three from the following: 303: Evaluate and specify restoration requirements

304: Select, prepare and apply decorative veneers

307: Complete high specification hand-crafted furniture

319: Replicate / restore wooden components of furniture

352: Define and develop standard operating procedures within the furniture, furnishings and interiors industry

358: Produce furniture production specifications

SVQs in Furniture 10 November 2010

Section 2: Evidence Requirements The following table outlines the evidence requirements for all Units.

EVIDENCE REQUIREMENTS

Performance Evidence The majority of the Candidate‟s evidence should come from direct observations of competence in the real workplace. Other types of acceptable evidence include, but are not limited to:

Witness Testimony

Logs/Diaries kept by Candidates

Recorded answers to questions posed by the Assessor

Recorded/Transcribed Interviews with the Candidate

Recorded use of up-to-date commercial/industrial equipment

e-portfolios and other forms of digital media

Works documentation attributable to the candidate Location of Assessment Although the majority of the Candidate‟s evidence should come from direct observations of competence in the real work place, in exceptional circumstances simulation of the real workplace may be allowed. Occasions in which this may be approved are listed below. Simulation

Simulation is generally not acceptable. The exceptions to this are: — Dealing with emergencies — Dealing with accidents — Certain pre-approved real time simulators — Limited other procedures that cannot be practically performed in the

workplace, and for which sufficient evidence cannot be collected through other means.

Any simulation must be approved in advance by the External Verifier, and clear reasons must be given for its intended use

If approval is given, all Awarding Body guidance and requirements must be observed

Simulation should not be the primary source of a candidate‟s claim to competence

SVQs in Furniture 11 November 2010

Section 3: Units making up the SVQs

SVQs in Furniture 12 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 201: Prepare and assemble furniture using mechanical fixings This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare and make furniture using mechanical fixings. This involves:

Checking and preparing components

Prepare and assemble components to specification

Working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety

Finishing and checking the assembly conforms to specifications There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 201.1 Prepare components and equipment 201.2 Assemble components 201.3 Check and complete finished assemblies

There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 13 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Tools and equipment Hand operated and machine equipment used within modern

furniture production environments for sanding, scraping, filing, drilling, boring, stapling, pinning, screwing, removing faults in furniture components.

Equipment problems These relate to none functioning, missing or damaged tools and equipment or equipment parts. The person carrying out would be expected to solve any equipment problem for which maintenance engineers are not required. Where a problem does require a maintenance engineer the person would be expected to report the problem to a more senior person.

Components The pieces which are assembled to create furniture items. They may be made of wood composites, metals or plastics.

Joints The joints used in making production furniture whether for the domestic or office market. These include mechanical joints which are pinned screwed or stapled together.

Specifications The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of qualities of components to be used, the method of fixing and tolerances to be achieved. The specifications will also detail the assembly to be produced and the time in which this must be completed. In the context of these standards a tolerance of +/- 0.5 mm would be expected.

Assembly An assembly is some part of an item of furniture which will be combined with other assemblies to make the full item. For example kitchen/ bedroom units or other knock down type assemblies.

Assembly problems The problems will be related to the quality of the components relating to tolerance whether any are incorrect missing or damaged in some way. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying minor repairs; problem which cannot be solved in this way will be reported using correct work place procedures.

Mechanical fasteners The screws, staples, pins and bolts used in modern furniture production methods.

Substances This includes grease, adhesives, solvents and general manufacturing debris.

SVQs in Furniture 14 November 2010

ELEMENT 201.1 Prepare component and equipment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Make sure that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

3. Check that the equipment to be used is in a safe and useable condition and that it is set to the required position

4. Complete the preparations within the required time

5. Accurately check components and surfaces against specifications and reject any which are of unacceptable quality

6. Make sure that joint surfaces are clean and free of substances

7. Mark out components accurately to within the allowed tolerance specifications

8. Drill and bore holes for mechanical fasteners to the required dimensions and position

9. Match components so that they are uniform

10. Sort components according to type

11. Deal promptly with any damaged and incorrect components or surfaces and report any which prevent you from completing the preparations

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for preparation of furniture assembly

b) the functions and uses of different types of equipment used in furniture assembly

c) how to handle power tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

d) the handling characteristics of wood composites and how this affects the way you handle and prepare components

e) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

f) what Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) to use and why

g) how to set out a work area for efficient working and health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

h) what the consequences are of substances being left on work surfaces

i) the types of equipment fault that can occur and how to recognise and deal with them

SVQs in Furniture 15 November 2010

ELEMENT 201.2 Assemble components

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Lay components and tools out for assembly

2. Where applicable, check that components match colour/grain specifications

3. Complete assembly in the correct sequence accordance to work specifications

4. Use the correct size and type of fasteners in mechanical joints

5. Use template and jigs when it may be necessary

6. Reject and report any assemblies which are not finished to specification

7. Deal promptly with any problems that arise, reporting any which you cannot solve

8. Assemble components to specified quality and tolerance levels

9. Complete the process within the required time

To do this you need to know:

a) Why it is important that components are assembled in a particular sequence

b) the different types of mechanical fixings used, what each is for and when it is used

c) the functions and uses of different types of equipments used in furniture assemblies

d) what the consequences are of incorrect sorting of components

e) why is it important to use the correct techniques and equipment for filing, sanding, scraping, drilling and boring of wood composites

f) what preparations are required for making mechanical joints

g) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

h) what personal protective equipment should be worn when assembling and why

i) work rates that you are expected to meet

j) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 16 November 2010

ELEMENT 201.3 Check and complete finished assemblies

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check assembly for quality standards, reporting any faults which you cannot solve

2. Fill any defected surfaces using appropriate substance and colour, where required

3. Where applicable, clean surfaces appropriately for the required finish

4. Check and confirm that finished assemblies meet specification requirements

5. Complete required records so that they are accurate and legible

6. Pass the completed assemblies over to the next stage in the production process in the required condition

7. Clean and clear work area in preparation for the next assembly

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for checking of finished assemblies

b) why is it important to check and confirm that the assembly is as specified

c) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

d) what information is recorded on production records and why it is important that these are kept up to date and accurate

e) why it is important to pass the completed assemblies to the next stage, in the correct condition and at the required time

f) who to report unsolvable problems to

g) why its important to keep to time schedules

h) types of problems that can occur and how to recognise and deal with them

i) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 17 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 203: Join and joint veneers This Unit addresses the competence required to produce sheet veneers for use in furniture production. This involves:

selecting veneers and planning the cutting process

cutting and joining veneers

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 203.1 Select and cut sheet veneers 203.2 Join sheet veneers There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 18 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Equipment The machine equipment used within modern furniture

production environments for cutting and jointing veneers. Cutting equipment includes standard cross cut and machines and guillotines. Jointing equipment includes stitching machines and tape machines.

Cuts This Unit covers flame, crown and quarter cut veneer cuts.

Equipment problems These relate to non-functioning, missing or damaged equipment or equipment parts (eg blades). The person carrying out this work would be expected to deal with any equipment problem for which maintenance engineers are not required. Where a problem does require a maintenance engineer, the person would be expected to report the problem to a more senior person.

Veneers Veneers used in furniture production are made of natural timber and may be of feather, burr, flame or crown designs. Typical timbers would include walnut, mahogany, cherry, pine, man made veneers, laminates and foils.

Joints The joints used in modern veneer production processes may include the making of quartered panels and stringed sheets. These are influenced by the design required, which will be stated in the specifications. Joints must be accurately matched for grain, colour and quality of veneer and edges must accurately align to and abut each other without distortion.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the qualities (colour, grain, grade) of the veneer to be used, the nature of the joints to be made and the size and shape dimensions to be achieved. The specification will also detail the time within which the production of sheet veneers must be completed. In the context of these standards, tolerances to within +/- 0.5 mm would be expected.

Jointing faults Jointing faults can arise from misalignment of panels, marks and damage to the veneers. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and making minor repairs where these can be achieved without affecting the quality of the work. Problems which cannot be resolved in that way would be reported using the correct workplace procedures.

SVQs in Furniture 19 November 2010

ELEMENT 203.1 Select and cut sheet veneers

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Select veneers which meet the colour, grain, grade and quality requirements in the work specification

2. Check that the veneers selected have no intermittent or full faults

3. Follow specified procedures to set aside, identify and report unsuitable veneers

4. Accurately measure and mark out the cuts to be made to within the specified tolerances

5. Minimise waste in your choice of veneers and in how you measure and mark them out for cutting

6. Handle the veneers in ways that avoid damaging them

7. Set up the cutting equipment to accurately and cleanly cut the required length and width of veneers

8. Control the cutting process so that the veneers produced are of accurate size and shape

9. Deal promptly with any equipment problems that arise, reporting any which you cannot solve

10. Follow safe working procedures when setting up and operating the cutting equipment

11. Transfer surplus and cut veneers to designated storage locations

12. Complete the cutting process within the required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for veneers

b) what kinds of natural faults and handling damage can occur with veneers

c) how to identify faults which mean that the veneer cannot be used

d) why it is important to keep waste to a minimum

e) the handling characteristics of veneers and how to protect them from damage during cutting and storage

f) what the consequences are of inaccurate measuring and cutting

g) how to set up cutting equipment safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

h) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

i) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

j) the types of equipment fault that can occur and how to recognise and deal with them

k) what work rate you are expected to achieve

SVQs in Furniture 20 November 2010

ELEMENT 203.2 Join sheet veneers

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Match veneers for grain, colour and quality to meet the design requirements

2. Accurately measure and align the veneers to form the required design when jointed

3. Set up the jointing equipment to ensure that edges are correctly aligned and jointed to the required tolerances, without distortion of the veneer

4. Control the jointing process so that the results meet the specified quality

5. Handle the veneers in ways which avoid damaging them

6. Deal promptly with any equipment problems and joint faults that arise, reporting any which you cannot solve

7. Follow safe working procedures when setting up and operating the jointing equipment

8. Check and confirm that the veneers meet the specification before passing them on

9. Transfer completed veneers to the designated storage location

10. Complete the process within the required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for veneers

b) when and why quartered panel and stringed sheet jointing methods may be used

c) what to look for when matching for straight, figured or burr veneers

d) the different types of furniture product which use veneers

e) the implications of different types of veneer and veneer design for the jointing process

f) the handling characteristics of veneers and how to protect them from damage during jointing and storage

g) what kind of faults can occur with jointing veneers and what can be done to overcome them

h) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

i) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1988

j) quality checks that should be carried out on completed veneers and what the implications are of passing on work that does not pass the checks

k) work rates that you are expected to meet

SVQs in Furniture 21 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 204: Lay veneers This Unit addresses the competence required to apply sheet veneers for use in furniture manufacture. This involves:

preparing equipment and materials for applying veneers

applying veneers to surfaces

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 204.1 Prepare equipment and materials for veneering 204.2 Lay veneers There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 22 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Adhesives There are a range of commercially available adhesives in use in

furniture manufacture. Most require some form of preparation, including mixing to a specified viscosity and heating to a required working temperature. The handling, storage and disposal of wastes will all be covered by procedures put in place following risk assessments under the COSHH regulations.

Equipment The machine equipment used within furniture manufacturing environments for applying veneers. This includes single and multi-press machines and mechanical adhesive spreaders. Pressing may be done using hot or cold cramps. Adhesives may also be applied using manual or mechanical spreaders.

Equipment problems These relate to non-functioning, missing or damaged equipment or equipment parts. The person carrying out this work would be expected to deal with any equipment problem for which maintenance engineers are not required. Where a problem does require a maintenance engineer, the person would be expected to report the problem to a more senior person.

Surfaces The surface of the furniture item which is to be veneered. Surfaces need to be prepared so that the veneer can be firmly bonded. The kind of preparation will depend on whether the surface is made of natural timber of wood composite and on the type of adhesive and pressing to be carried out. Typical preparations will include keying, sanding, toothing and de-greasing.

Veneers Veneers used in furniture manufacture are made of natural timber and may be of feather, burr, flame or crown designs. Typical timbers would include walnut, mahogany, cherry, pine.

Veneer pressing faults The kinds of faults which can occur are blisters, glue penetration, misalignment or marking. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and making minor repairs where these can be achieved without affecting the quality of the work. Problems which cannot be resolved in that way would be reported using the correct workplace procedures.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the qualities (colour, grain, grade) of the veneer to be used and the moisture content. The specification will also detail the choice of adhesive, the type of pressing and the time within which the veneering process must be completed.

SVQs in Furniture 23 November 2010

ELEMENT 204.1 Prepare equipment and materials for veneering

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

3. Check that adhesives are in date before using them

4. Prepare surfaces to receive the veneer, making sure that they are free of irregularities, defects, dust and debris

5. Follow manufacturer‟s instructions when preparing the adhesives

6. Maintain adhesives in the required condition for use until needed

7. Follow safe working procedures when lifting and moving heavy items

8. Follow COSHH procedures when handling adhesives and de-greasing agents (if used)

9. Return unused adhesives and de-greasing agents to the designated storage areas

10. Dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures and disposal areas

11. Complete the preparations within the required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for veneering

b) why different surfaces require different preparations and the consequences of inadequate preparation

c) the importance of seasoning regarding contraction, expansion and moisture content

d) why and when it may be necessary to use de-greasing agents to ensure adhesives will take

e) the different sort of adhesives that are used and the consequences of not preparing them properly

f) the implications for the preparation process of the pot life, shelf life, open time and curing time of adhesives

g) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

h) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

i) why it is important to handle and store adhesives and de-greasing agents in line with specified procedures

j) the work schedule you are required to meet

k) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 24 November 2010

ELEMENT 204.2 Lay veneers

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check that the adhesives and core are in the required condition before starting work

2. Apply the adhesive evenly and to the required thickness

3. Set up the pressing equipment so that the required pressure and temperature will be applied and the specified cycle followed

4. Control the pressing process so that the results meet the specified quality

5. Handle the veneers and cores in ways which avoid damaging them

6. Deal promptly with any equipment problems and pressing faults that arise, reporting any which you cannot solve

7. Follow safe working procedures when setting up and operating veneering equipment

8. Accurately trim and cut veneered panels to the required size

9. Check and confirm that the veneered surfaces meet the specification before passing them on

10. Transfer completed items to the designated storage location

11. Return unused adhesives to the designated storage areas

12. Dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures and disposal areas

13. Complete the process within the required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for veneers

b) the different types of cramp available and their purpose

c) the consequences of using incorrect temperature, pressure or cycle times

d) the handling characteristics and effects of pressing different types of veneers

e) how to protect them from damage during pressing and storage

f) what kind of faults can occur when applying veneers, how to recognise them, and what can be done to overcome them

g) what causes veneers to become discoloured and what can be done to prevent this

h) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

i) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

j) quality checks that should be carried out on completed veneers and what the implications are of passing on work that does not pass the checks

k) work rates that you are expected to meet

SVQs in Furniture 25 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 205: Attach fittings to furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to attach fittings to production furniture wooden furniture. This involves:

checking and preparing fittings against specifications

attach the fitting to match specifications

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 205.1 Attach fittings 205.2 Fit doors, falls and drawers There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 26 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Equipment and tools The hand operated and machine equipment used within

furniture making environments for sanding, scraping, filing drilling, boring, stapling, pinning, screwing, cramping/pressing, gauging and removing faults in wooden components.

Fittings Hinges, mouldings, handles, runners, stops, locks, castors, catches, brackets, action mechanisms, pre-cut glassware.

Fitting method Fittings are attached by screwing or pinning, or combinations of these.

Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the qualities (type, size, number) of the fittings to be used, the fitting methods to be used and the fitting tolerances to be achieved. The specification will also detail the time within which the work must be completed. In the context of these standards, tolerances for fittings to within +/- 0.5mm would be expected, and tolerances of within +/- 0.5mm for doors, falls and drawers.

Doors, falls and drawers These may be made of natural timber or wood composites.

SVQs in Furniture 27 November 2010

ELEMENT 205.1 Attach fittings

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check that you have the required tools, equipment and fitting to achieve the work specification

2. Check that the fittings to be used conform to the specification

3. Replace and discard any fittings which are of unacceptable quality

4. Position the fittings for correctness of fit within the required tolerances

5. Ensure that surfaces to which the fittings are to be attached are in a suitable condition

6. Securely attach the fittings using the required method

7. Follow safe working procedures when setting up and operating powered equipment

8. Follow COSHH procedures when handling adhesives

9. Complete the preparations within the required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for furniture fittings

b) the different types of fittings used in furniture production and their purpose

c) the quality checks to be made before fittings are used and the consequences of not doing these

d) what the consequences are of incorrect positioning of furniture fittings

e) what the consequences are of not securing furniture fittings correctly

f) when and why different methods for attaching furniture fittings are used

g) the functions and uses of the different types of equipment used in furniture assembly

h) how to handle powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

i) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

j) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

k) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 28 November 2010

ELEMENT 205.2 Fit doors, falls and drawers

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately check the doors, falls and drawers against the specification and reject any which are damage or of incorrect appearance

2. Check and confirm that doors, falls and drawers fit to within the specified tolerances for alignment and movement

3. Make good any fitting faults which need to be dealt with for the specified quality to be achieved

4. Complete the fitting within the required time

5. Accurately complete quality checks and confirm that they have been met before passing on the work

6. Follow safe working procedures when setting up and operating powered equipment

7. Follow COSHH procedures when handling adhesives

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications re fitting furniture doors, falls and drawers

b) the handling characteristics of natural timber and wood composites and how these affect the fitting of doors, falls and drawers and the making good of fitting faults

c) what to look for when checking that doors, falls and drawers match a specification

d) why it is important to check that fit tolerances are met

e) why it is important to use the correct techniques and equipment for filing, sanding, scraping, drilling and boring of natural woods and wood composites to make good any fitting faults

f) what level of fitting fault can be made good immediately and when to reject and report a fault

g) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

h) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

i) work rates that you are expected to meet

j) what quality checks are required

SVQs in Furniture 29 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 206: Prepare to apply finishing processes to production furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare production furniture for finishing. This involves:

preparing workpieces and materials for finishing

preparing furniture coating materials

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 206.1 Prepare workpieces for finishing 206.2 Prepare furniture coating materials There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 30 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Coating materials Stains, sealers, basecoats, lacquers and thinners applied

as coatings as part of the finishing process in furniture production. They can be based on oil, water or mixed solvents.

Tools and equipment Tools and equipment include rags, filler knives and hand-held spray guns, sanding equipment and abrasives. Control of machine operations is dealt with in another Unit.

Faults The kinds of faults which could occur would include uneven applications, poor wetting, blotching, marking of the surface, drips. runs, streaks, mismatched shading or poor surface finish. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and dealing with faults which can be treated without disruption to the production process. Problems which cannot be resolved in that way would be reported using the correct workplace procedures.

Production records These may be written or electronic. Typically they will involve the individual in completing a simple form, much of which may be of a tick-box format, requiring only a limited amount of free text to be entered.

Surface defects Surface defects can occur during the finishing process. They may take the form of nibs, holes, scratches, chips, dents, cracks, blisters and blemishes. If minor, they can be overcome using sanding equipment and abrasives. If major they require the workpiece to be removed and reported.

Workpiece The item of furniture to be coated as part of the finishing process. This may be a component, sub-assembly or assembly used in furniture production. The workpiece to be treated may be made of natural timber (solid or veneered) or of wood composite.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the types, application area and characteristics (colour, viscosity, formulation) of the coatings to be applied, the number of coats to be applied and the drying requirements (natural or forced). The specification will also detail the time within which the process must be completed and the personal protective equipment which should be worn. Specifications may be oral or written and may involve the use of diagrams and colour cards.

SVQs in Furniture 31 November 2010

ELEMENT 206.1 Prepare workpieces for finishing

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

3. Check the workpiece and accurately identify faults that are present

4. Select and apply appropriate fillers and stoppers for the surface

5. Make sure that surfaces are clean and free of dust, damage and debris

6. Make sure that filled surfaces are made level with the surrounding areas

7. Make sure areas of raised grain are re-textured to blend with the surrounds when the finish is applied

8. Mask surfaces which are not to be stained in such a way as to avoid damage from splashes and seepages

9. Follow safe working procedures when:

lifting and moving heavy items;

handling cleaning agents, fillers, stoppers and abrasives;

setting up and using powered tools

10. Confirm that the workpiece meets specifications before passing it on to the next stage in the finishing process

11. Complete the preparations within the required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for furniture production

b) what checks are carried out on workpieces which are being prepared for finishing

c) what sorts of faults can occur and how to recognise them

d) what sorts of faults can be dealt with within the production process

e) what sort of faults mean that the workpiece has to be taken out of the production process for further examination and treatment

f) the types and purpose of fillers and stoppers

g) how to recognise different grades of abrasives and what each is used for

h) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

i) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

j) the work schedule you are required to meet

SVQs in Furniture 32 November 2010

ELEMENT 206.1 Prepare furniture coating materials

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check that the specified materials are available and in date

2. Select materials which match the specification characteristics

3. Ensure that extraction facilities are operating effectively before working with solvent based materials

4. Immediately report any problems with extraction facilities

5. Mix the materials to the specified consistency and colour requirements

6. Use the correct comparison standards to confirm that the colour and shading of prepared materials is acceptable

7. Deal promptly and safely with spillages and splashes

8. Follow COSHH procedures when handling coating materials

9. Make sure that unused materials are accurately labelled and return them to the designated storage areas

10. Dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures and disposal areas

11. Complete the process within the required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for furniture coating materials

b) the different types of coating materials used, what each is for and when it is used

c) what the implications are of using materials that are inappropriate for the workpiece or are out of specification

d) what the implications are of incorrect mixing and stirring of materials

e) why it is important to use the correct standards when checking for colour and shade

f) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

g) what personal protective equipment should be worn when handling coating materials and why

h) why there needs to be adequate ventilation and extraction of fumes when dealing with solvent based materials and who to report to, if this is not working

i) why it is important to deal promptly, safely and correctly with splashes and spillages of materials

j) why it is important to label unused materials clearly and accurately

k) what the storage requirements are for different types of materials and the implications of not storing them correctly

l) what work rates you are expected to meet

SVQs in Furniture 33 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 207: Apply finishing processes to production furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to apply finishing processes to production furniture. This involves:

applying sealing and polishing coats

checking that the finished item conforms to the specification

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 207.1 Apply stains, seals and finishes 207.2 Check finish and complete necessary documentation There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 34 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Coating materials Stains, sealers, basecoats, lacquers and thinners applied

as coatings as part of the finishing process in furniture production. They can be based on oil, water or mixed solvents.

Tools and equipment Coatings may be applied using rags and hand-held spray guns. Control of machine operations is dealt with in another Unit.

Faults The kinds of faults which could occur would include uneven applications, poor wetting, blotching, marking of the surface, drip, runs, streaks, mismatched shading or poor surface finish. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and dealing with faults which can be treated without disruption to the production process. Problems which cannot be resolved in that way would be reported using the correct workplace procedures.

Production records These may be written or electronic. Typically they will involve the individual in completing a simple form, much of which may be of a tick-box format, requiring only a limited amount of free text to be entered.

Surface defects Surface defects can occur during the finishing process. They may take the form of nibs, holes, scratches, chips, dents, cracks, blisters and blemishes. If minor, they can be overcome using sanding equipment and abrasives. If major they require the workpiece to be removed and reported.

Workpiece The item of furniture to be coated as part of the finishing process. This may be a component, sub-assembly or assembly used in furniture production. The workpiece to be treated may be made of natural timber (solid or veneered) or of wood composite.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the types, application area and characteristics (colour, viscosity, formulation) of the coatings to be applied, the number of coats to be applied and the drying requirements (natural or forced). The specification will also detail the time within which the process must be completed and the personal protective equipment which should be worn. Specifications may be oral or written and may involve the use of diagrams and colour cards.

SVQs in Furniture 35 November 2010

ELEMENT 207.1 Apply stains, seals and finishes

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Ensure that extraction facilities are operating effectively before working with solvent based materials

2. Apply the coating evenly and to the required finish

3. Use tools and equipment safely and effectively

4. Deal promptly with faults and minor surface defects which occur

5. Report any faults or defects which prevent the workpiece being finished within the production process

6. Deal promptly and safely with spillages and splashes

7. Allow specified drying times between multiple coats

8. Make sure that surfaces are clean and free of excess materials and surface irregularities between multiple coats

9. Follow safe working practices at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for furniture coating materials

b) the different types of coating materials used, what each is for and when it is used

c) what the drying times are of different materials

d) when and why natural and forced drying methods are used

e) what the lacquer curing process involves

f) why it is important to use the correct standards when checking for colour and shade

g) what kinds of faults and minor surface defects can occur in the application of coatings and what steps can be taken to deal with them

h) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

i) what personal protective equipment should be worn when handling coating materials and why

j) why there needs to be adequate ventilation and extraction of fumes when dealing with solvent based materials and who to report to, if this is not working

k) why it is important to deal promptly, safely and correctly with splashes and spillages of materials

l) why it is important to label unused materials clearly and accurately

SVQs in Furniture 36 November 2010

ELEMENT 207.2 Check finish and complete necessary documentation

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Complete finish according to work specification

2. Check and confirm that the specified colour, shade and finish has been achieved according to the work specification

3. Deal promptly with any problems that arise, reporting those that you cannot solve

4. Make sure that unused materials are accurately labelled and return them to the designated storage areas

5. Dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures and disposal areas

6. Transfer the finished workpiece to the designated storage location

7. Complete the process within the required time

8. Complete production records accurately and clearly

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for furniture coating materials

b) the importance of checking the workpiece is finished according to the specification

c) how to deal with problems, and who to report unsolvable problems to

d) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

e) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

f) what personal protective equipment should be worn when handling coating materials and why

g) why it is important to deal promptly, safely and correctly with splashes and spillages of materials

h) why it is important that waste materials, including rags, are disposed of safely

i) what information is recorded on production records and why it is important that these are kept up to date and accurate

j) what work rates you are expected to meet

SVQs in Furniture 37 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 209: Assist with the operation of furniture production machinery This Unit addresses the competence required to support the operation of machinery carrying out a range of functions within a furniture production environment. This involves:

loading and positioning materials into machinery

monitoring and reporting on operations

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 209.1 Load machinery 209.2 Assist with the operation of machinery There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 38 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Danger Danger may arise from malfunction, breakages of

materials or from an operator becoming trapped by some moving part.

Damage Damage to materials and components can take several forms. In the case of hardwood, softwood, composite board materials and veneer panels there may be warping, twisting, splitting or bruising or there may be shakes, surface gouges or dead knots.

Machinery The type of machinery covered by this Unit includes wood machining equipment and veneer presses.

Operations The machine operations covered by this Unit include feeding of woods into wood machining equipment, and the mechanical spreading of adhesives during veneering.

Materials The materials relevant to wood machining are lengths of hard and soft woods, and composite boards. The materials in the case of veneering presses are the veneers and cores to which the veneer is to be applied.

Personal protective equipment Ear, eye and respiratory protection as well as protective gloves and footwear.

Report Reporting of progress may involve telling the operator or supervisor as well as completing required records, either in written form or electronically.

Specification The set of instructions which describe the materials to be loaded and the nature and expected progress of the operations to be carried out.

SVQs in Furniture 39 November 2010

ELEMENT 209.1 Load machinery

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check that you have a complete and clear specification of the required materials

2. Ask a supervisor for advice on any aspects of the specification which are unclear or incomplete

3. Get confirmation that the machine has been set and is ready to received the materials

4. Select and load materials of the required quality and quantity to meet the specification

5. Make sure that the loaded materials are secure in the correct position

6. Make sure that any workholding devices and guards are in place before reporting that loading is complete

7. Reject and report any materials which are damaged or of unacceptable quality

8. Use safe handling and lifting techniques when loading the materials

9. Follow safe working procedures when loading and working near powered equipment

10. Wear the appropriate personal protective equipment for the machine and materials

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used to describe materials used in furniture production

b) what to look for when checking different types of materials against a specification

c) who is authorised to set machines for operation

d) how to handle and load materials in ways that prevent them being damaged

e) how to recognise materials that are damaged or otherwise unacceptable quality

f) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

g) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

h) what personal protective equipment to use and why

i) the types of damage that can occur and how to recognise them

SVQs in Furniture 40 November 2010

ELEMENT 209.2 Assist with the operation of machinery

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Assist with start up of machinery if required

2. Operate the machinery within safe working limits at all times

3. Compare the progress of the operation against specifications

4. Adjust the operation as necessary to produced the required outcome

5. Promptly report any deviations from expected progress which are outside your control and/or not your responsibility

6. Keep accurate and complete records of the operation and outputs

7. Cause an emergency stop immediately if any aspect of the machine operation constitutes a danger, and report your action to a supervisor

8. Report the progress of the operation using the required procedures

To do this you need to know:

a) why it is important to carry out pre-start up checks and what these involve

b) what the safe working limits are for the machinery you are using and how to adjust the controls to keep it within them and achieve the required outcomes

c) what the expected progress of the operation should be in terms of timing, stages and outputs

d) who to report deviations to and why it is important to do this promptly

e) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

f) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

g) what personal protective equipment to use and why

h) what would constitute a danger and mean that an emergency stop was needed

i) what information is recorded about the operation

j) what the implications are of not keeping accurate and complete records

k) why it is important to maintain work schedules

SVQs in Furniture 41 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 210: Prepare to upholster standard items of modern furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare to upholster items of furniture. This involves:

preparing the frame for upholstery

application of suspension and filling materials

maintaining your own and others‟ safety while working There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 210.1 Prepare an item to be upholstered 210.2 Fit suspension and filling components There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 42 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Item to be upholstered The items to be upholstered could include any of the

following;

modern furniture such as an armchair (to include wings), settee

contract furniture such as a long seating Unit, a curved/angled seating Unit, stool or chair office furniture such as a chair, reception seating, stool or executive swivel chair

Upholstery materials The different forms of material used to provide padding within an upholstered item and for covers and finishing. These include a range of different fabric types, including materials that require careful handing and where alignment and tensioning may require skill to achieve, eg patterned/striped fabrics, plain pile, vinyl, stretch fabrics and flat weave fabrics, as well as natural hide and where the specification calls for a pleated cover shape. In addition, materials include foams and fillings as well as finishing materials used in edgings, trimmings and linings and for the covering of buttons.

Components The support and suspension materials used in upholstery and which require to be fixed to the frame to provide the shape and support needed.

Tools and equipment Hammers, staplers and staple removers, knives, shears and scalpels, stretching devices. These include webbings, foams, wadding, rubberised hair, platforms, insulation pads, serpentine springs and modern spring systems. They may be fixed in place using staples or upholstery tacks, nails and proprietary fixings.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used, the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

all fixed components are secure

components should be accurately centred and evenly spaced

material should be cut and shaped to conform to the specified design profiles

visual appearance, (including alignment of patterns, pleating and spacing of tacks, staples etc)

The specification may require wooden components to be stripped before the application of upholstery materials.

Problems In relation to preparatory work, these will be to do with non-functional or missing tools or equipment and/or missing, mismatched, damaged or unsuitable materials and components. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rejecting, replacing or rectifying these sorts of problems, reporting them when they cannot be

SVQs in Furniture 43 November 2010

dealt with quickly, safely and readily. In relation to the securing of covers, trimmings and other finishings, these will be to do with misalignment, incorrect tensioning, shaping errors, marks on the material and/or insecure or ineffective ancillary fittings

SVQs in Furniture 44 November 2010

ELEMENT 210.1 Prepare an item to be upholstered

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

3. Deal promptly with any problems that arise with the tools, equipment and materials, reporting any which you cannot solve

4. Make sure that the item to be upholstered is protected from damage while it is being prepared

5. Prepare the frame for upholstery according to the specification

6. Follow safe working procedures when:

using sharp tools and items of equipment;

using powered equipment;

lifting and moving heavy items

7. Complete the preparations within the required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different types of materials and their uses, including suspensions, support materials, edgings, fixings and trimmings

b) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

c) what steps can and should be taken to protect the item from damage

d) the functions of the different types of tools and equipment that are used in upholstery

e) how to handle sharp and powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

f) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

g) how to deal with problems and who to report unsolvable problems to

h) how to set out a work area for efficient working and the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

SVQs in Furniture 45 November 2010

ELEMENT 210.2 Fit suspension and filling components

In carrying out this work you must

1. Accurately cut and shape components according to the work specification

2. Accurately position components to provide the structure and shape specified

3. Fix components securely using the correct fixings for the type of component

4. Check and confirm that the quality is as specified

5. Deal promptly with any problems that occur, and report those that you cannot solve to the

6. appropriate person

7. Follow safe working procedures at all times

8. Keep the work area tidy and protect the item from damage while it is being worked on

9. Complete the process within a required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics and functions of different types of components

b) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

c) how to measure, cut and fix components to give the specified structure and shape

d) when to use different methods to secure components

e) the sorts of problems that can occur and how to deal with them to meet the specification

f) who to report unsolvable problems to

g) the functions of the different types of tools and equipment that are used in upholstery

h) how to handle sharp and powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

i) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

j) the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

k) why it is important to keep to time schedules

SVQs in Furniture 46 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 211: Upholster standard items of modern furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare for and upholster items of furniture. This involves:

preparing, cutting and applying upholstery materials

trimming and finishing items of furniture

maintaining your own and others‟ safety while working There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 211.1 Fit material to an item of modern upholstered furniture 211.2 Finish an item of modern upholstered furniture There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 47 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Item to be upholstered The items to be upholstered could include any of the following;

domestic furniture such as an armchair (to include wings), or a settee

contract furniture such as a long seating Unit, a curved/angled seating unit, stool or chair

office furniture such as a chair, reception seating, stool or executive swivel chair

Upholstery materials The different forms of material used to provide padding within

an upholstered item and for covers and finishing. These include a range of different fabric types, including materials that require careful handing and where alignment and tensioning may require skill to achieve, eg patterned/striped fabrics, plain pile, vinyl, stretch fabrics and flat weave fabrics, as well as natural hide and where the specification calls for a pleated cover shape. In addition, materials include fillings such as hair/fibre as well as finishing materials used in edgings, trimmings and linings and for the covering of buttons.

Components The support and suspension materials used in upholstery and which require to be fixed to the frame to provide the shape and support needed. These include webbings, foams, wadding, rubberised hair, platforms, insulation pads, serpentine springs and modern spring systems, paper, plastic and polyfoam. They may be fixed in place using staples, upholstery tacks, nails and proprietary fixings.

Tools and equipment Hammers, staplers and staple removers, knives, shears and scalpels, stretching devices.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used, the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

all fixed components are secure components should be accurately centred and evenly spaced. Material should be cut and shaped to conform to the specified design profiles, visual appearance, (including alignment of patterns, pleating and spacing of tacks, staples etc). The specification may require wooden components to be stripped before the application of upholstery materials.

Problems In relation to preparatory work, these will be to do with non-functional or missing tools or equipment and/or missing, mismatched, damaged or unsuitable materials and components. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rejecting, replacing or rectifying these sorts of problems, reporting them when they cannot be dealt with quickly, safely and readily. In relation to the securing of covers, trimmings and other finishings, these will be to do with misalignment, incorrect tensioning, shaping errors, marks on the material and/or insecure or ineffective ancillary fittings.

SVQs in Furniture 48 November 2010

ELEMENT 211.1 Fit material to an item of modern upholstered furniture

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check that you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

2. Deal promptly with any problems that arise with the tools, equipment and materials, reporting any which you cannot solve

3. Make sure that the item to be upholstered is protected from damage while it is being worked on

4. Accurately position the upholstery material, checking that the alignment is correct, before cutting it as required to fit the item

5. Secure the cover firmly, tensioning it to the required level

6. Make adjustments as necessary to make sure that the visual appearance, fixing and tensioning of the cover conforms to the specification

7. Secure the bottom cloth firmly and accurately to conform to visual and safety requirements

8. Follow safe working procedures when:

using sharp tools and items of equipment;

using powered equipment;

lifting and moving heavy items

9. Complete the preparations within the required time

10. Keep the work area tidy and protect the item from damage while it is being worked on

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different types of materials used as upholstery covers and bottom cloths

b) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

c) the steps and actions needed to position and fit covers to different types of item

d) how to measure and cut upholstery cover materials to ensure an accurate fit within an economic level of wastage

e) when to use different methods to secure upholstery covers

f) the importance and use of the bottom cloth in upholstery

g) the sorts of problems that can occur during in fitting covers to upholstered items and how to deal with them to meet the specification

h) the functions of the different types of tools and equipment that are used in upholstery

i) how to handle sharp and powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

j) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

k) the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

l) why it is important to keep to time schedules

SVQs in Furniture 49 November 2010

ELEMENT 211.2 Finish an item of modern upholstered furniture

In carrying out this work you must

1. Accurately position any specified trimmings and finishings

2. Fix securely any specified trimmings and finishings

3. Check and confirm that the required quality outcome has been achieved before reporting work as complete

4. Place completed item in a designated location and position for safe storage

5. Deal promptly with any problems that occur

6. Report any problems that you cannot solve

7. Complete the process within the required time

8. Follow safe working procedures when:

using sharp tools and items of equipment

using powered equipment

lifting and moving heavy items

9. Keep your work area tidy and protect the item from damage while it is being worked on

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

b) the steps and actions needed to position and fit trimmings and finishings to different types of item

c) why it is important to check and confirm that the required quality outcome has been achieved

before reporting the item as finished

d) the sorts of problems that can occur and how to deal with them to meet the specification, and who

to report unsolvable problems to

e) the functions of the different types of tools and equipment that are used in upholstery

f) how to handle sharp and powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

g) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find

out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your

organisation

h) the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

i) why it is important to keep to time schedules

j) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 50 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 212: Prepare fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings and/or upholstery This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare fabric and components used in upholstery and/or soft furnishings. This involves:

preparing fabrics, templates and lays

laying out fabrics

matching fabrics

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 212.1 Prepare fabrics, templates and lays 212.2 Layout and match fabric There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 51 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Materials The different forms of material used for upholstery and soft

furnishings. These include a range of different fabrics, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics, plain pile, vinyl, stretch fabrics and flat weave fabrics, as well as natural hide. In addition, materials include finishing materials used in edgings, trimmings and linings and for the covering of buttons.

Components The pieces of material from which an upholstery item (eg cover, bottom cloth) or soft furnishing item (eg curtain length, lining, blind, bed hanging) is fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. They may be simple or complex, symmetrical or asymmetrical.

Templates and lays The moulds or shapes used to enable the marking out and cutting of material to specified size and shape. They may be made of paper, card, hardboard, plywood or plastic.

Cutting tools and equipment Manual cutting equipment including:

knives

shears

scalpels Powered cutting equipment including:

powered knives

circular cutters

panel cutters

slitting machines

cutting benches

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material shall be shaped and cut accurately, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting

component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm

Problems In relation to the preparation and laying out of templates, fabrics and lays, these will be to do with material defects, colour/pattern mismatching, defects and faults in templates and lays. In relation to the cutting process, these will be to do blunt or non-functional tools and equipment. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rejecting, replacing or rectifying these sorts of problems, reporting them when they cannot be dealt with quickly, safely and readily.

SVQs in Furniture 52 November 2010

ELEMENT 212.1 Prepare fabrics, templates and lays

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

3. Obtain the fabric, templates and lays and check that they conform to the specification

4. Deal promptly with any problems that arise, reporting any which you cannot solve

5. Follow safe working practices at all times

6. Keep work area tidy and protect items from damage while they are being worked on

7. Follow safe working procedures when lifting and moving heavy items

8. Complete the preparations within the required time

9. Complete required records so that they are accurate and legible

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery and/or soft furnishings

b) the functions of the different types of tools and equipment that are used in upholstery and/or soft furnishings

c) how to handle sharp and powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

d) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety legislation

e) how to set out a work area for efficient working and the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

f) where to obtain the fabric, templates and lays from and how to check that they conform to specification

g) what the consequences are of lubricants and debris being left on work surfaces, tools and equipment

h) what information should be recorded and why this is important

SVQs in Furniture 53 November 2010

ELEMENT 212.2 Layout and match material

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check that the pattern and batch number of the material corresponds with the specification

2. When necessary colour match part rolls and integrate them into the complete job

3. Position and roll the material so that it lies flat, square and true on the cutting bench

4. Mark any material faults which are within specification limits

5. Check, when necessary that the pattern of the material is matched

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

7. Follow safe working procedures at all times

8. Keep your work area tidy and protect the fabric from damage while it is being worked on

9. Store unused part rolls of material in a designated location and position

10. Complete preparations within required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials used in upholstery and soft furnishings

b) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery and soft furnishings

c) why it is important to check fabrics, templates and lays against specifications and what to do where there are faults or problems with them

d) the handling and rolling out characteristics of different types of fabrics used in upholstery and soft furnishings

e) how to match the pattern if necessary

f) how and why to manage the use of part rolls of fabrics

g) types of fabric, template and lay faults which occur, how they are identified and how they can be dealt with

h) the importance of storing fabrics in suitable locations and positions

i) waste limits and why waste should be kept to a minimum

j) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety legislation

k) who to report an unsolvable problem to

l) equipment storage arrangements and why it is important to follow them

m) why it is important to keep to time schedules

n) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 54 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 213: Cut fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings and/or upholstery This Unit addresses the competence required to cut fabrics used in upholstery and/or soft furnishings. This involves:

cutting fabric components

marking and sorting components

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 213.1 Cut fabrics 213.2 Mark and prepare fabric components There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 55 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Materials The different forms of material used for upholstery and

soft furnishings. These include a range of different fabrics, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics, plain pile, vinyl, stretch fabrics and flat weave fabrics, as well as natural hide. In addition, „materials‟ includes finishing materials used in edgings, trimmings and linings and for the covering of buttons.

Components The pieces of material from which an upholstery item (eg cover, bottom cloth) or soft furnishing item (eg curtain length, lining, blind, bed hanging) is fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. They may be simple or complex, symmetrical or asymmetrical.

Templates and lays The moulds or shapes used to enable the marking out and cutting of material to specified size and shape. They may be made of paper, card, hardboard, plywood or plastic.

Cutting tools and equipment Manual cutting equipment including:

knives

shears

scalpels Powered cutting equipment including:

powered knives

circular cutters

panel cutters

slitting machines

cutting benches

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met: material shall be shaped and cut accurately, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm.

Problems In relation to the preparation and laying out of templates, fabrics and lays, these will be to do with material defects, colour/pattern mismatching, defects and faults in templates and lays. In relation to the cutting process, these will be to do with blunt or non-functional tools and equipment. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rejecting, replacing or rectifying these sorts of problems, reporting them when they cannot be dealt with quickly, safely and readily.

SVQs in Furniture 56 November 2010

ELEMENT 213.1 Cut fabric components

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Plan the marking out and cutting of the material so as to minimise waste and take account of material type, width and pile

2. Take account of material pattern, type, width and pile when marking out and cutting

3. Correctly align marked components on the material, taking account of pattern matching when appropriate

4. Make sure that marked components will be free of major flaws and that any minor defects will not be visible when used

5. Mark out components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits

6. Cut the components cleanly and accurately to within the given size and shape tolerances

7. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

8. Follow safe working procedures when:

using sharp tools and items of equipment;

using powered equipment;

9. Keep your work area tidy and protect the material from damage while it is being worked on

10. Store cutting tools and equipment in a designated safe location and position

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials used in upholstery and soft furnishings

b) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery and soft furnishings

c) why it is necessary to maintain cut components within the given tolerances

d) what wastage levels apply and why it is important to minimise waste

e) the sorts of problems that can occur during marking out and cutting materials and how to deal with them

f) when and why it is important to match the pattern

g) the functions and uses of the different types of tools and equipment that are used in cutting material

h) how to handle sharp and powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

i) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety legislation

j) the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

k) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

SVQs in Furniture 57 November 2010

ELEMENT 213.2 Mark and prepare fabric components

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Sort out , mark the cut components using the designated identification system

2. Remove templates and lays and check that they are free from damage before storing them over for future use

3. Prepare the components according to the specification and confirm that they are ready for the next stage in the process

4. Protect the components from damage while they are being handled and passed on to the next stage

5. Sort out and move any left over material and wastes into the designated locations according to what is to happen to them

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any damaged templates, lays and other problems

7. Pass the components over to the next stage in the process in the required time

8. Complete required records so that they are accurate and legible

To do this you need to know:

a) which markers it is most appropriate to use for different types of material

b) how and why components are marked and what sorts of systems are used

c) how to determine when templates and lays are beyond use and how to make repairs to those that can be repaired

d) how to interpret work specifications so as to identify the preparations needed

e) why it is important to protect components from damage

f) how to handle and store left over materials so as to make the best use of them

g) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

h) waste handling arrangements in the workplace

i) what information should be recorded and why this is important

SVQs in Furniture 58 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 214: Produce simple seamed components by hand and machine This Unit addresses the competence required to produce simple seamed components used in upholstery and soft furnishing production by hand and through the use of machinery. This involves:

preparing components and materials

stitching seams to specification

pressing materials before and after stitching to achieve specification

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 214.1 Prepare to produce simple seamed components 214.2 Stitch simple seams to specification There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 59 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Components This Unit covers the making of upholstery and soft

furnishing components which require the use of simple rather than complex seams. Examples could include straight and shaped sews (on upholstery top covers and bottom cloths, curtain lengths, cushions/bolsters or bed hangings).

Materials The different forms of material used in soft furnishings and upholstery. These include materials that are easy to handle and those which require careful handing if sewing is to result in components which are properly aligned, eg patterned/striped, plain/pile, stretch and flat weave fabrics.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

seam stitch length and tensioning is within accepted tolerance

seam type (eg straight sews, shaped sews) is correct

shape and size measurements are within +/- 3mm tolerance

Tools and equipment The hand and machine equipment used within soft

furnishing and upholstery manufacture. Sewing equipment includes lockstitch machines, long arm machines, twin needle machines, overlock machines and multi-needle machines and their various components ie work-holding devices, needles, thread spools, feet. Hand equipment includes needles, pins, scissors, pinking shears, seam ripper, bodkin, cloth tape measure, tailor‟s chalk, upholstery needle, upholstery skewer. Pressing equipment to include irons and any other pressing equipment.

SVQs in Furniture 60 November 2010

ELEMENT 214.1 Prepare to produce simple seamed components

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check that you have the required tools, equipment and materials to achieve the work specification

2. Check that the materials to be used are of the specified, correct colour and type

3. Check that the sewing equipment to be used is in a safe and functional condition and clean of grease and other sources of potential damage to fabric

4. Make sure that the work area is clear and clean

5. Follow the correct procedures to identify and discard any materials that are not to specification

6. Set up sewing machines with the correct work holding devices, needles, feet and thread spools for the work to be carried out

7. Carry out test stitching to confirm that stitch length and fabric reaction are within specifications

8. Follow safe working procedures when setting up and operating sewing equipment

9. Deal promptly with any problems which arise, reporting any which you cannot solve

10. Complete the preparations within the required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in describing upholstery and soft furnishing components

b) why it is important to have a clear and clean work area and the consequences of lubricants or debris getting onto materials

c) the functions and uses of the different types of sewing equipment used in upholstery

d) the functions and uses of the different types of foot and needle in use

e) what the implications are of inappropriate tensioning of stitches and how to overcome problems this can cause

f) the functions and uses of the different types of sewing machine components

g) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

h) what your personal limitations are in respect of dealing with problems which can arise

i) the types of equipment fault that can occur and how to recognise and deal with them

j) when and why machine, needle, foot and spool checks are carried out

k) the characteristics of different types of upholstery fabrics and how these affect the preparations that are needed before sewing and the threads to be used

l) when and why to carry out test sews, the types of faults they can show up and what adjustments are needed to deal with them

m) types of fabric, template and lay faults which occur, how they are identified and how they can be dealt with

n) what is an economic time for setting up and preparing to produce simple seamed components

SVQs in Furniture 61 November 2010

ELEMENT 214.2 Stitch simple seams to specification

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Stitch the items in the required sequence and alignment for the component being produced

2. Make sure that seams are of the correct dimension and outline for the component being produced

3. Leave the correct seam allowance and ensure that it is even

4. Use the correct stitch length and structure for the material and component, whether by hand and/or machine

5. Complete the stitching within the required time

6. Deal promptly and effectively with stitching errors

7. Complete the stitched items so that they are ready for use

8. If required, check and confirm that the pressing equipment is clean and ready for use

9. Use the correct technique for pressing items

10. Accurately complete quality checks and confirm that they have been met before passing on the work

11. Follow safe working procedures when setting up and operating sewing equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in describing upholstery and soft furnishing components

b) the handling and sewing characteristics of common type of material used in soft furnishings and upholstery

c) the different types of stitching, either hand and/or machine that are used in simple upholstery and soft furnishing seams and when each is used

d) why a seam allowance is left

e) what the implications are of inappropriate tensioning of stitches and how to overcome problems this can cause

f) what sort of stitching errors can occur and how to resolve them

g) why it is important to complete seams by trimming, notching and/or the removal of basting before the component is used

h) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety in the workplace

i) work rates that you are expected to meet

j) when and what type of pressing equipment to use

k) what techniques need to be used when pressing items

l) what quality checks are required

SVQs in Furniture 62 November 2010

Unit 215: Produce standard window treatments This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare components and produce a standard window treatment. This involves:

measuring and cutting fabric to make a curtain and/or blind

sewing the components to make a curtain and/or blind

trimming and finishing the curtain and/or blind

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 215.1 Prepare components for a window treatment 215.2 Sew a standard window treatment 215.3 Finish a window treatment There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 63 November 2010

Scope statement

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards Components The pieces of material from which a window treatment is

fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. Examples of sewing method could include straight, shaped sews and seams involving simple pleating. Different heading tapes and types, such as sheer and net, gathered, pencil, triple pleat, smocked, cartridge, box and looped headings. Different types of blind, chain and/or button weights.

Fabrics The different forms of material used for making window treatments. These include a range of different fabric, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics with a minimum pattern repeat of 25cm, plain and patterned pile, flat weave fabrics.

Fixing methods This Unit covers the use of hand sewing, including slip stitch, ladder stitch and hemming stitch. Machine sewing including flat and flat fell seams. Gluing, tacking and stapling where appropriate.

Problems

In relation to the cutting of fabrics, these will be to do with flaws, distortions and colour/pattern variations in the fabric, inaccurate measurements and mis-alignments. In relation to the assembly and sewing process, these will be to do with slipping, fraying, inaccuracies, poor seam quality and equipment faults. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rectifying these types of problems in ways which ensure that the quality of the outcome is not compromised.

Sewing This Unit covers both machine and hand sewing. Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be

carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material cutting and shaping accuracy is to within +/- 5mm, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting

component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm

Trimmings and finishings This Unit covers the assembly and/or fixing of tie backs, ropes and tassels, holdbacks, valances, pelmets and blinds.

Tools and equipment This Unit covers the use of cutting equipment including knives, shears and scalpels, measuring and marking equipment and both hand sewing equipment including scissors, pins, needles, thread, tailor‟s chalk, bodkin and sewing machines.

SVQs in Furniture 64 November 2010

ELEMENT 215.1 Prepare components for a window treatment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep the work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

3. Plan the cutting of the fabric so as to minimise waste and take account of the design characteristics and handling implications of the fabric to be used

4. Measure and mark out the components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits for the fabric being used

5. Ensure fabric placement and alignment is appropriate for the type and number of components required and the fabric characteristics

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

7. Follow safe working procedures when using sharp tools and items of equipment

8. Protect the fabric from damage while it is being worked on

9. Make sure that the components are clearly and accurately marked where necessary

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for window treatments

b) the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials used in window treatments

c) how many measurements and of which dimension are needed to ensure accurate cutting and fitting in respect of different types of component

d) which markers are most appropriate to use for different types of fabric

e) what cutting tolerances are appropriate for different types of component and in what ways this may be influenced by fabric type

f) what the implications are of not properly placing and aligning fabric before cutting it

g) why it is important to minimise waste

h) how to take account of design characteristics such as pattern repeats and pile direction in planning cutting

i) the sorts of problems that can occur during marking out and cutting fabric and how to deal with them

j) the functions and uses of the different types of measuring and marking tools

k) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

l) what steps should be taken to protect fabric from damage

SVQs in Furniture 65 November 2010

ELEMENT 215.2 Sew a standard window treatment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately place all materials and components in their correct position

2. Make sure that components are correctly orientated and aligned to meet fabric, pattern and design requirements

3. Attach the components in an efficient sequence

4. Use sewing methods which are appropriate to the type of component

5. Attach the components together securely and to the required shape and finish

6. Locate, sew and secure heading tape as appropriate

7. Attach lining component if required by appropriate method

8. Check and confirm that there are no protruding or sharp fixings on the finished window treatment

9. Check and confirm that there are no loose threads on the finished window treatment

10. Check and confirm that the visual appearance of the window treatment meets the specification

11. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

12. Follow safe working practices when using fixing tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different fabrics and how this can affect their behaviour during positioning and fixing

b) why the sequence in which components are attached is important to the efficiency of the process and the quality of the outcome achieved

c) when and why different types of linings may be used in window treatments

d) when and why sorts of fixing methods are used

e) how headings are attached and the different uses of heading methods

f) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

g) when and why to carry out checks to confirm that there are no sharp or protruding fixings

h) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

i) your personal responsibility with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 66 November 2010

ELEMENT 215.3 Finish a window treatment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need to complete the specification

2. Check that you have the required finishing specification and that it is complete

3. Assemble components using appropriate method

4. Attach components using appropriate fixing method

5. Accurately position any finishings to give the required visual appearance

6. Securely attach the finishings using methods which will give the required durability and appearance

7. Make sure that there are no loose ends or visible stitchings

8. Follow an efficient sequence when applying finishings

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working procedures at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) what sorts of trimmings and finishings are used in window treatments and why

b) when and why different fixing methods are used for window treatments

c) terms used in technical specifications for window treatments

d) why the sequence in which the components are attached is of importance to the appearance of the finished window treatment

e) how to make sure that patterns and spacings of methods of window finishings are accurate and what role the sequence of application plays in that

f) what methods of fixing will give pelmets and hanging system the appropriate strength for their purpose

g) the principles which underlie the positioning of hanging systems for stability and movement

h) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

i) who to report to with unsolvable problems

j) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 67 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 216: Produce workshop equipment This Unit addresses the competence required to produce workshop equipment for use in furniture making. This involves:

developing and drafting specifications

following specifications

applying a range of wood working techniques

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 216.1 Produce specifications for workshop tools and devices 216.2 Produce workshop tools and devices There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 68 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Format Usually specifications will be written or drawn and the

competence involved in producing specifications requires the ability to describe technical details in text form and to prepare technical drawings. While the production of workshop tools and devices will usually be from a written or drawn specification, the competent person should also be able to work from specifications given orally.

Materials The materials used in constructing workshop tools and devices include hardwoods, softwoods, wood composites (typically plywood, chipboard or MDF) and adhesives.

Personal protective equipment Ear, eye and respiratory protection as well as protective gloves and footwear.

Specifications Specifications are details as to the length, width, thickness, angle and surface finish requirements to be worked to in producing different workshop tools and devices used in making hand crafted furniture. They also refer to the performance accuracy which they must be produced to achieve. These would typically be within +/- 0.5 mm tolerances.

Surface finish Smooth, planed and sanded surface finishes will be needed, depending on the workshop tool or device being specified and produced.

Techniques Sawing, planing, drilling, chiselling and routing.

Tools and equipment The chisels, planes, cramps, saws, drills, drill bits, squares, mallets, scrapers, honing stones, knives and measuring devices used in the making of hand-crafted furniture. Also includes powered tools such as sanders, routers, drills, power saws and planers. Workshop tools and devices include jigs, patterns and templates.

SVQs in Furniture 69 November 2010

ELEMENT 216.1 Produce specifications for workshop tools and devices

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Make sure that you have clear and complete details on the requirements to be specified

2. Clarify and confirm any requirements which are unusual, unclear and difficult to meet

3. Determine what the specification will need to include for the requirements you have been given to be accurately met

4. Produce a clear specification, making correct use of technical terms and units of measurement and scale

5. Include full and accurate details on:

what is to be made

the materials and tools to be used

the surface finish to be achieved

the techniques to be used

the dimensions and tolerance levels to be achieved in the finished item

safety requirements to be met

6. Complete the specification in the required time

7. Provide the specification to the person who needs it in the format requested

To do this you need to know:

a) the different sorts of workshop tools and devices that are used in making wooden furniture by hand

b) what sorts of materials, tools and techniques are used for making different workshop tools and devices and why

c) the meaning of technical terms used to describe workshop tools and devices

d) units of measurement used to specify length, width, thickness and performance accuracy and the tolerance levels to which each should be specified

e) conventions used in the preparation of cutting lists and technical drawings

f) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

SVQs in Furniture 70 November 2010

ELEMENT 216.2 Produce workshop tools and devices

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials and tools you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

3. Follow the specification correctly and completely and accurately measure and mark out the material

4. Use the specified techniques correctly

5. Clean off any excess glue, debris and foreign objects

6. Check and confirm that you have achieved the required tolerances, surface finish and performance accuracy before handing the item over as complete

7. Follow safe working practices when handling tools and materials

8. Promptly ask for advice on how to deal with any problems that arise in meeting the specification

9. Return all tools and unused materials to the correct storage locations after use

10. Complete the work within the required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the different sorts of workshop tools and devices that are used in making wooden furniture by hand

b) what sorts of materials, tools and techniques are used for making different workshop tools and devices and why

c) the meaning of technical terms used to describe workshop tools and devices

d) units of measurement used to specify length, width, thickness and performance accuracy and the tolerance levels associated with them

e) how to identify the face side of material and why correct and accurate surface preparation is important

f) what the growth characteristics are of different hard and soft woods and what implications this has for how to work with them

g) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

h) how to test tools and devices for dimensional accuracy and performance accuracy

i) why it is important to return tools and materials to storage when not in use

j) how long it should take to achieve different sorts of specifications

SVQs in Furniture 71 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 217: Make and assemble wooden components of hand-crafted furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to make wooden components for hand-crafted furniture (a significant quantity of the joint work in this Unit should be hand cut; in particular through and lapped dove tails). This involves:

cutting, shaping and moulding components

cutting joints

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety

There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 217.1 Cut, shape and mould components to size 217.2 Cut and joint components for hand-crafted furniture There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 72 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Adhesives Commercially available glues used in making hand-crafted

furniture. These include polyvinyl acetate, urea or phenol formaldehyde, animal based glues, resorcinol, polyurethane and epoxy resins.

Components The pieces from which an assembly within hand-crafted furniture is constructed.

Cutting Using saws (eg tenon, dovetail, dimension or band), planes (eg jack, smoothing, block, scraper, rebate, shoulder or bullnose), chisels (eg bevel-edged, mortice, firmer and paring) and routers.

Joints The joints used in making hand-crafted furniture. They include insertion, scarf, rub joints, knock-down, dove-tail, mitred dove-tail, mortise and tenon, mitred tenon, bridle, lap, mitre, tongue and groove, loose tongue, housing, dowel, biscuit and butt joints.

Materials The softwoods, hardwoods and wood composites used in making/ furniture. Composites would include plywood, chipboard and MDF. Woods may be of an oily or resinous nature, have a ripple or interlocking grain and be of a burr or pippy structure.

Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the qualities (colour, grain), the nature of the joints to be made and the tolerances to be achieved. In the context of this Unit, tolerances to within (0.5mm) would be expected. Specifications will usually be provided by verbal, written form or by diagrams from research. A competent person should also be able to work from verbal instructions.

Techniques The techniques covered by this Unit are chiselling, drilling, boring, sawing, planing, moulding, scraping, abrading, splicing, and matching, squaring and precise measurement.

Tools and Equipment The hand and powered tools used in the making of hand crafted furniture, including basic fixed and portable wood working machinery. Hand tools include rulers, pencils, vernier callipers, chisels, planes, cramps, saws, drills, drill bits, squares, mallets, scrapers, honing stones, knives, gauges as well as workshop tools and devices such as bench hooks, winding sticks, shooting boards, mitre blocks of different angles, scratch stock, work benches. Examples of powered tools would include biscuit jointers, sanders, routers, drills and saws. Examples of machinery would include lathes, presses, bandsaw, dimension saw, surface planer and thicknesser.

SVQs in Furniture 73 November 2010

ELEMENT 217.1 Cut, shape and mould components to size

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Make sure that you have clear and complete details of the specification to be met

3. Check that materials are free of flaws which would affect their suitability for the component to be made and discard any which are not

4. Accurately measure and mark out lines/profiles to be made to within the specified tolerances

5. Use effective techniques for alignment of surfaces.

6. Check and confirm that moulded components have the required contour

7. Use the correct adhesives and pressure when gluing materials.

8. Minimise waste in your choice of materials and in how you measure and mark them out for cutting

9. Handle the materials and components in ways that avoid damaging them

10. Cut the components accurately to size and shape, keeping within the required tolerances

11. Use tools safely and effectively

12. Return tools and equipment to the correct storage locations when not in use

13. Dispose of wastes safely to the designated location.

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for component production and assembly

b) the functions and uses of the different types of tools and equipment used in furniture assembly

c) what personal protective equipment to use and why

d) how to set out a work area for efficient working and the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

e) the handling characteristics of different species of wood used in hand-crafted furniture

f) what kinds of flaws would affect the utility of a piece of wood within furniture construction

g) why it is important to work with the grain of wood and the implications of not doing so

h) how the characteristics of different wood composites affect the way they are cut and handled

i) what the consequences are of inaccurate measuring and cutting

j) what the consequences are of using poor technique when shaping materials

k) how to use manual and powered tools and equipment safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

l) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

m) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation.

n) how to handle adhesives safely, including the use of appropriate personal protective equipment and adequate ventilation

o) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 74 November 2010

ELEMENT 217.2 Cut and joint components for hand-crafted furniture

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Orient the materials to be used in the correct face and grain alignment

3. Check that materials are free from flaws which might affect their suitability for joint construction and discard any that are not

4. Make sure that you have clear and complete details of the joints to be produced

5. Use an appropriate method to measure, mark out and control the dimensions of the cuts

6. Cut the joints accurately to within the required tolerances

7. Check and confirm that joints fit correctly before making them permanent

8. Deal promptly and effectively with any joint faults that arise

9. Clean and sand the components as required so that they can be effectively worked

10. Check and confirm that the finished joint components meet the specified quality for alignment shape and grain orientation

11. Use appropriate techniques to check joints and assembly for square

12. Use tools safely and effectively

13. Return tools and equipment to the correct storage locations when not in use

14. Dispose of wastes safely to the designated location

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for joints

b) the functions and uses of the different types of tools and equipment used in furniture assembly

c) what personal protective equipment to use and why

d) how to set out a work area for efficient working and the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

e) the handling characteristics of different species of wood used in hand-crafted furniture

f) what kinds of flaws would affect the utility of a piece of wood within furniture construction

g) why it is important to work with the grain of wood and the implications of not doing so

h) how the characteristics of different wood composites affect the way they are cut and their suitability for different joint constructions

i) what the consequences are of inaccurate measuring and cutting

j) the mechanics of joint construction

k) the limitations of different jointing components and alternative jointing techniques that can be used

l) how to use manual and powered tools and equipment safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

m) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation.

n) how to handle adhesives safely, including the use of appropriate personal protective equipment and adequate ventilation

o) how to handle adhesives safely, including the use of appropriate personal protective equipment and adequate ventilation

SVQs in Furniture 75 November 2010

p) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

q) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 76 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 218: Match, measure and mark out veneers This Unit addresses the competence required to make standard veneers for use in making furniture. This involves:

selecting veneers and planning the cutting process

cutting and joining veneers

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 218.1 Measure and mark out veneers 218.2 Match veneers There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 77 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Conditions The conditions under which veneers require to be kept includes

flattening and damping them to ensure that they remain in a suitable state for working.

Joints The joints used in making standard veneers would include the making of quartered panels, edged sheets and stringed sheets. These are influenced by the design required, which will be stated in the specifications. Joints must be accurately matched for grain orientation, colour and hue, decoration and light refraction qualities.

Jointing faults Jointing faults can arise from misalignment of panels, marks and damage to the veneers. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and making minor repairs where these can be achieved without affecting the quality of the work. Problems which cannot be resolved in that way would be reported to a senior person using the correct workplace procedures.

Tools and equipment The tools and equipment used within furniture production environments for cutting and jointing veneers by hand and mechanical means. This includes veneering saws and knives, planes, measuring devices, veneering tape, set squares and protractors.

Quality The quality of a veneer can be described in terms of the grain fineness and orientation, its colour, hue and decoration, moisture content and light refraction characteristics. Veneers require to be matched for these qualities for use in straight, slip laid, leaf laid, book match and edge veneering.

Veneers Veneers used in making furniture are made of natural timber. Examples of the types of timbers from which veneers are made would include hard and soft woods such as walnut, oak, mahogany, cherry, maple or pine.

Work specification

The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the qualities of the veneer be produced, the length, width and shape of veneer required and the nature of the joints to be made. In the context of these standards, length, width and shape tolerances to within +/- 0.5mm would be expected. The specification will also detail the storage condition requirements for the veneers.

Personal Protective Equipment Ear, eye and respiratory protection as well as protective gloves and footwear.

SVQs in Furniture 78 November 2010

ELEMENT 218.1 Measure and mark out veneers

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Select veneers which meet the quality requirements in the work specification

2. Check that the veneers selected have no intermittent or full faults and set aside any which do

3. Match selected veneers for decoration, grain orientation and light refraction requirements

4. Minimise waste in your choice of veneers and in how you measure and mark them out for cutting

5. Handle the veneers in ways that avoid damaging them

6. Measure and mark the veneers accurately to size and shape, keeping within the required tolerances

7. Use safe and effective techniques to make the cuts

8. Make sure that veneer surfaces to be glued are free of irregularities and are sanded and cleaned to the required surface finish

9. Store the veneers in appropriate conditions to keep them in the required state for working

10. Follow safe working procedures at all times.

11. Ensure the work area is kept clean and tidy.

12. Dispose of wastes safely to the designated area.

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for veneers

b) what kinds of natural faults and handling damage can occur with veneers

c) how to identify faults which mean that the veneer cannot be used

d) why it is important to keep waste to a minimum

e) what characteristics are used to describe the quality of a veneer and how to identify them

f) how to balance and match veneers

g) the growth and handling characteristics of different species of wood used as veneers, and how this affects the way they are cut and stored

h) the handling characteristics of veneers of different types and qualities and how to protect them from damage

i) why veneers may need to be flattened and damped during storage and the implications of not doing this

j) what the consequences are of inaccurate measuring and cutting

k) how to use cutting tools and equipment safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

l) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

m) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

SVQs in Furniture 79 November 2010

ELEMENT 218.2 Match veneers

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Match veneers for quality, size and shape to meet the design requirements

2. Set aside any veneers which are of unacceptable quality

3. Accurately measure and align the veneers to form the required size when jointed

4. Make the joints of the required type

5. Check and confirm that the results meet the specified quality

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any joint faults that arise

7. Handle the veneers in ways which avoid damaging them

8. Store the joined and jointed veneers in appropriate conditions to keep them in the required state for application

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for veneers

b) when and why quartered panel and stringed sheet jointing methods are used

c) what to look for when matching different types of veneers

d) the handling characteristics of veneers and how these can affect the jointing process

e) what characteristics are used to describe the quality of a veneer and how to identify them

f) the handling characteristics of veneers of different types and qualities and how to protect them from damage

g) why veneers may need to be flattened and damped during storage and the implications of not doing this

h) what kind of faults can occur with jointing veneers and what can be done to overcome them

i) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

j) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

k) quality checks that should be carried out on jointed veneers

SVQs in Furniture 80 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 219: Lay veneers by hand and press method This Unit addresses the competence required to lay standard veneers and inlays for use in making furniture. This involves:

laying standard veneers

hand fitting inlays to groundwork

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 219.1 Lay hand-crafted veneers 219.2 Fit inlays to groundwork There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 81 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Adhesives Commercially available glues used in making furniture. These

include polyvinyl acetate, urea or phenol formaldehyde, animal based glues, and resorcinol.

Conditions The conditions under which veneers and inlays require to be kept includes flattening and damping them to ensure that they remain in a suitable state for working. The environmental conditions needed for effective working relate to temperature, humidity and ventilation.

Faults Veneer laying faults can arise as a result of misalignment, discolouration, marking or blistering of the veneer or glue penetration. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and making minor repairs where these can be achieved without affecting the quality of the work. Problems which cannot be resolved in that way would be reported to a senior crafts person using the correct workplace procedures.

Inlays The types of inlays covered by this Unit are veneered and stringing. They are made of wood, other natural material or man-made materials.

Surface The surfaces to which veneers are applied in the context of this Unit cover top, edge, back and underneath positions, as well as curved and flat surfaces.

Tools and equipment The tools and equipment used within hand-crafted furniture production environments for laying veneers and fitting inlays covers veneering hammers, heated and unheated presses, heated cauls, adhesive rollers, edge clamps, veneer pins, adhesive pots, brushes and glue sticks, flat irons and sand bags.

Veneers Veneers used in making furniture are made of natural timber. Typical timbers would include walnut, oak, mahogany, cherry and maple.

Veneering methods The veneering methods covered by this Unit are hand laying and manually operated pressing. Inlay fitting methods are dry fitting, pressing and the use of adhesives.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the surfaces to be veneers and inlays to be used, the methods to be applied and the adhesives to use. The specification will also detail the storage condition requirements for the veneers.

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Ear, eye and respiratory protection as well as protective gloves and footwear.

SVQs in Furniture 82 November 2010

ELEMENT 219.1 Lay standard hand-crafted veneers

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Make sure that the groundwork is secure, clean, free of debris and damage that could affect the veneering process and at the required temperature for the adhesive type to be used

2. Position the veneers accurately on the specified surface

3. Follow the specified veneering method, using safe and effective technique

4. Working within the COSHH regulations, ensure adhesives are mixed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions

5. Working within the optimum time, ensure adhesive is applied evenly across the ground work

6. Apply even and appropriate pressure to the veneer according to the veneer type and surface

7. Handle the veneers in ways that avoid damaging them

8. Handle adhesives safely and apply them effectively to groundwork

9. Deal safely and promptly with adhesive spillages and splashes

10. Use the correct Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for the adhesives and equipment being used

11. Deal promptly and effectively with any faults that arise

12. Store the veneers in appropriate conditions to keep them in the required state for working

13. Dispose of unwanted adhesives safely in the designated location and in accordance with COSHH Regulations

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for veneers

b) what kinds of handling damage can occur with veneers and how to avoid it

c) what kinds of faults can occur with veneering and how to deal with them

d) how atmospheric conditions can affect the veneering process

e) why veneers may need to be flattened and damped during storage and the implications of not doing this

f) when and why different veneering methods are used

g) the open times, shelf life and setting times of adhesives and the implications of these for the way you work

h) the different types of adhesives, their absorption capabilities through inlays and veneers and their compatibility with veneers of different types

i) problems associated with adhesives and how to overcome them

j) the uses and benefits of different ways of pressing

k) what the consequences are of inaccurate positioning

l) where, when and how to use different types of adhesives

m) why preparation is so important to the quality of the work

n) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

o) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 83 November 2010

ELEMENT 219.2 Hand fit inlays in groundwork

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check and confirm that the inlay design and type matches the specification

2. Determine the best sequence to follow to achieve the specified result

3. Make sure that the groundwork is secure, clean, free of debris and damage that could affect the fitting process and at the required temperature for the adhesive type to be used

4. Make sure that the inlay fits the groundwork laterally and vertically

5. Clean the surface so that it is free of any excess adhesives

6. Key the surface using appropriate tools and techniques, so that the finish meets the specification

7. Deal promptly and effectively with any faults that arise

8. Follow the specified fitting method, using safe and effective technique

9. Handle the inlays in ways which avoid damaging them

10. Handle adhesives safely and apply them effectively to groundwork

11. Deal safely and promptly with adhesive spillages and splashes

12. Use the correct Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for the adhesives and equipment being used

13. Store the inlays in appropriate conditions to keep them in the required state for application

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for inlays

b) the purpose of different tools and equipment used in fitting inlays

c) the differences between veneered and stringing inlays and the depth of inlay required for each

d) what kinds of handling damage can occur with inlays and how to avoid it

e) what kinds of faults can occur with inlay fitting and how to deal with them

f) how atmospheric conditions can affect the fitting process

g) how inlays should be stored and why

h) when and why different fitting methods are used

i) the open times, shelf life and setting times of adhesives and the implications of these for the way you work

j) the different types of adhesives, their absorption capabilities through inlays and veneers and their compatibility with inlays of different types

k) problems associated with adhesives and how to overcome them

l) the uses and benefits of different ways of pressing

m) what the consequences are of inaccurate positioning

n) where, when and how to use different types of adhesives

o) why preparation is so important to the quality of the work

p) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

SVQs in Furniture 84 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 220: Apply stains, sealers and primers This Unit addresses the competence required to apply finishing processing to furniture. This involves:

applying stains to surfaces

applying sealing and polishing coats

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 220.1 Apply stains by hand 220.2 Apply sealers and primers by hand There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 85 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Stains, sealers and primers This Unit covers the application of pre-formulated

traditional stains, modern stains, shellac sealers, pre-formulated and two-pack sealers, shellac polishes, french polishing lacquers and traditional oil-based primers. They may be based on oil, water or spirit as the solvent. Masking materials are tapes and liquids.

Tools and equipment Stains, sealers and primers are applied by hand, involving the use of cloths, brushes, rags, pads, sponges and tak rags for the removal of dust.

Faults Types of faults that could occur during application of materials would include uneven applications, poor wetting, blotching, marking of the surface, drips, runs, streaks, mismatched shading or poor surface finish. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and dealing with faults which can be treated readily if responded to promptly. Problems which cannot be resolved in that way would be reported using the correct workplace procedures.

Materials Other than the stains, sealers and primers, there will also be need for the use of abrasive powders, de-greasing agents, cleaning solvents, waxes, stoppers, and burnishing creams. Bleach may also be used when appropriate.

Personal Protective Equipment This covers eye protection, gloves, overalls and respiratory equipment as well as barrier, cleansing and after-care creams.

Surface Surfaces may be solid wood, veneered, particle board, flat panels, curves and turns. The surfaces may be part of a component, sub-assembly or assembly used furniture or a piece of new wood to be treated before being worked.

Surface changes The sorts of surface changes that might arise during application of stains, sealers and primers would include nibs, holes, scratches, chips, dents, cracks, blisters and blemishes.

Workpiece The item of furniture to be worked upon. This may be a component, sub- assembly or assembly of a piece of furniture. The workpiece to be treated may be made of natural timber (solid or veneered) or of wood composite. It may be a flat panel or a curved or turned shape.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, the types, application area and characteristics (colour, viscosity, formulation) of the materials to be applied and the drying requirements (natural or forced). The specification will also detail the time within which the process must be completed and the personal protective equipment which should be worn. Specifications may be oral or written and may involve the use of diagrams and colour cards.

SVQs in Furniture 86 November 2010

ELEMENT 220.1 Apply stains by hand

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Make sure that you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

3. When appropriate, bleach without damage to workpiece

4. Accurately mask off areas which are not to be stained to protect them from inadvertent staining

5. Select stains which accurately match the colour specification and are appropriate for the surface to be treated

6. Make sure that you have enough of the stain to complete the treatment before starting

7. Make sure that the working environment is suitable before, for the stains being used

8. Apply the stain to the finish and depth of colour required

9. Use an effective technique and appropriate tools for the kind of stain and type of surface

10. Allow specified drying times between multiple coats

11. Deal promptly and safely with spillages, splashes and other problems

12. Make sure that any surface changes are effectively dealt with

13. Follow COSHH procedures at all times and wear appropriate personal protective equipment for the materials being handled

14. Make sure that unused materials are accurately labelled and return them to the designated storage areas

15. Dispose of waste safely using designated procedures and disposal areas

16. Complete the process within the working time of the material

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for staining furniture

b) when bleaching to sample colour can be used as a technique

c) the different types of stains used, what each is for and when it is used

d) what the implications are of using stains that are inappropriate for the surface to be treated

e) when and why staining may be unnecessary

f) how to mask surfaces to stop stain penetration and which masking materials to use for different stains and surfaces

g) what the drying and working times are of different stains

h) why it is important to be accurate when checking against the colour specification

i) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

j) what personal protective equipment should be worn when handling stains and why

k) why the working environment needs to be at suitable levels of humidity, temperature and lighting as well as dust-free and adequately ventilated

l) why it is important to deal promptly, safely and correctly with splashes and spillages

m) why it is important to label unused stains clearly and accurately

n) what the storage requirements are for different types of stain and the implications of not storing them correctly

SVQs in Furniture 87 November 2010

ELEMENT 220.2 Apply sealers and primers by hand

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Make sure that you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

3. Make sure that the working environment is suitable before, for the sealers and primers being used

4. Apply the coat evenly and to the required finish

5. Use an effective technique and appropriate tools for the kind of sealer, primer and type of surface

6. Deal promptly with faults and minor surface defects which occur while applying the treatment

7. Deal promptly and safely with spillages and splashes

8. Allow specified drying times between multiple coats

9. Make sure that surfaces are clean and free of excess materials and surface irregularities between multiple coats

10. Follow COSHH procedures at all times and wear appropriate personal protective equipment for the materials being handled

11. Make sure that unused materials are accurately labelled and return them to the designated storage areas

12. Dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures and disposal areas

13. Complete the process within the working time of the treatment material

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for sealing and priming furniture

b) the different types of sealers and primers used, what each is for and when it is used

c) what the implications are of using sealers and primers that are inappropriate for the surface to be treated

d) when and why sealing and priming may be unnecessary

e) what the drying and working times are of different sealers and primers

f) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

g) what personal protective equipment should be worn when handling sealers and primers and why

h) how to avoid sanding through the sealer and primer when de-nibbing

i) why the working environment needs to be at suitable levels of humidity, temperature and lighting as well as dust-free and adequately ventilated

j) why it is important to deal promptly, safely and correctly with splashes and spillages

k) why it is important to label unused sealers and primers clearly and accurately

l) what the storage requirements are for different types of sealers and primers and the implications of not storing them correctly

SVQs in Furniture 88 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 221: Prepare hand-crafted furniture for finishing This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare hand-crafted furniture for finishing This involves:

preparing work-pieces for finishing

applying fillers were required

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 221.1 Prepare hand-crafted work-pieces for finishing using powered hand tools and machinery 221.2 Manually prepare hand-crafted work-pieces for finishing There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 89 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Faults The kinds of faults which could occur to work-pieces prior to

treating would include machining marks, holes, bruising, splits, scratches, dents and the presence of adhesives. Types of faults that could occur during application of fillers would include over-thinned grain-fillers, incorrectly mixed grain-fillers and non-removal of excess grain-filler. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and dealing with faults which can be treated readily if responded to promptly. Problems which cannot be resolved in that way would be reported using the correct workplace procedures.

Finish This Unit covers finishes which may be rough-out, cross-sanding, smooth, open grained and full-grained.

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

This covers eye protection, gloves, overalls and respiratory equipment as well as barrier, cleansing and after-care creams.

Surface Surfaces may be solid wood, veneered or flat panels.

Tools equipment and Machinery

Preparing for Finishing involves sanding, cleaning and scraping, making use of hand sanding blocks, planes, scrapers, tak rags, cleaning rags, different grades of abrasive papers (this should include Aluminium oxide, Silicon Carbide, and Scotch bright pads). It may also include the use of palm, random orbital, disc, bobbin and hand held belt sanders, wide belt and narrow belt sanding machines. Fillers applied by hand.

Workpiece The item of furniture to be treated as part of the finishing process. This may be a component, sub-assembly or assembly used in hand-crafted furniture. The work-piece to be treated may be veneered, made of solid wood, or of wood composite.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the preparations to be carried. The specification will also detail the time within which the process must be completed and the personal protective equipment which should be worn. Specifications may be oral or written and may involve the use of diagrams and colour cards.

SVQs in Furniture 90 November 2010

ELEMENT 221.1 Prepare hand-crafted work-pieces for finishing using powered hand tools and machinery

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Make sure that you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

3. Check the work-piece and accurately identify any faults that are present

4. Apply the appropriate remedial treatment to any faults that are present

5. Inspect electric hand tools prior to use and take appropriate action if a fault is identified

6. Inspect abrasive machinery prior to use and take appropriate action if a fault is identified

7. Use appropriate electric tools, equipment and machinery following correct H&S procedures to achieve required finish (in the white)

8. Make sure that any adhesives left on surfaces are completely removed

9. Make sure that surfaces are clean and free of dust and debris

10. Make sure that surfaces are ready to receive the specified finish

11. Follow safe working procedures when:

lifting and moving heavy items;

using materials, tools equipment and machinery

12. Handle and store the workpiece in ways which protect it from damage

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for hand-crafted furniture

b) what checks are carried out on work-pieces which are being prepared for finishing

c) what sorts of faults can occur and how to recognise them

d) what remedial action to take to deal with different types of faults

e) which tools and equipment to use to remedy different sorts of faults

f) the types and purpose of fillers and stoppers

g) how to recognise different grades of abrasives and what each is used for

h) how to handle powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

i) how to recognise the types of equipment and machinery faults that can occur and how to deal with them appropriately

j) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

k) where work-pieces should be stored

l) how to protect work-pieces during handling and storage

m) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 91 November 2010

ELEMENT 221.2 Manually prepare hand-crafted work-pieces for finishing

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Make sure that you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

3. Check the work-piece and accurately identify any faults that are present

4. Apply the appropriate remedial treatment to any faults that are present

5. Sharpen and set hand tools to achieve required level of finish

6. Inspect hand tools prior to use and take appropriate action if a fault is identified

7. Use appropriate hand tools and equipment following correct H&S procedures to achieve required finish (in the white)

8. Make sure that any adhesives left on surfaces are completely removed

9. Make sure that surfaces are clean and free of dust and debris

10. Make sure that surfaces are ready to receive the specified finish

11. Follow safe working procedures when:

lifting and moving heavy items;

using tools and equipment

12. Handle and store the workpiece in ways which protect it from damage

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for hand-crafted furniture

b) what checks are carried out on work-pieces which are being prepared for finishing

c) what sorts of faults can occur and how to recognise them

d) what remedial action to take to deal with different types of faults

e) which tools and equipment to use to remedy different sorts of faults

f) how sharpen and set hand tools to achieve required level of finish

g) the types and purpose of fillers and stoppers

h) how to recognise different grades of abrasives and what each is used for

i) how to handle hand tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

j) how to recognise the types of equipment faults that can occur and how to deal with them

k) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

l) where work-pieces should be stored

m) how to protect work-pieces during handling and storage

n) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 92 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 228: Set up and operate woodworking machinery NB: This is an imported Unit and is a tailored version of Unit U1053434 which is owned by CITB and was last revised 5/2000. This Unit addresses the competence required to make timber and timber based products using wood working machinery. This involves:

interpreting information

planning, organising and adopting safe working practices

selecting and maximising resources

preparing and setting up machinery to work timber and timber-based materials to a specification There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 228.1 Prepare, set up and establish the suitability of machinery and materials 228.2 Modify materials to form timber and timber-based products 228.3 Contribute to the provision of a safe work environment There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 93 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Corrective actions The person carrying out this work would be expected to be

competent to isolate equipment until a malfunction is dealt with and to report a malfunction to the relevant person(s) to deal with it. In the event of hazards arising form work activities they would be expected to correct hazards which were within their own authority to address, report hazards to the person in charge and warn others of fire, accident or equipment failure.

Resources The resources covered by this Unit address both machinery and materials as well as support personnel and job documentation. Typical machinery within furniture manufacture would include:

table saw

sanding machine

band saw

narrow band saw

dimension saw

cross-cut saw

rip saw

planer/thicknesser

mortice machine/chisel morticer

CNC machines Typical materials within furniture manufacture would include:

timber (eg hard woods such as oak and mahogany and soft woods such as pine)

timber-based materials (eg composites)

Information Information on the work required and practices to follow can be obtained from a range of sources including drawings, cutting lists, specifications, spoken and written instructions, regulations and legal requirements, official guidance, manufacturers‟ instructions, security instructions and other organisational requirements.

Setting up Setting up covers the preparation of:

jigs and templates

work-piece supports

safety appliances

environmental control equipment

Work practices The work practices to be followed to maintain safety relate to:

following instructions

following company procedures and official guidance

identifying hazards

cleaning up and disposing of waste in your own work area and areas to which you have access

securing tools and equipment

using personal protective equipment

following organisational policy on personal behaviour

maintaining an acceptable level of personal hygiene

SVQs in Furniture 94 November 2010

ELEMENT 228.1 Prepare, set up and establish the suitability of machinery and materials

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Obtain and clarify all necessary information

2. Obtain and check the resources to make sure they are suitable for the work and meet the information requirements

3. Take the necessary corrective action when resources are incomplete or unsuitable

4. Set up the machinery to enable it to be used safely and effectively and to meet the information requirements

5. Confirm that the machinery is ready and able to carry out the relevant machining operations on the specified materials

6. Identify when repairs to machinery are necessary and/or when replacement is required

To do this you need to know:

a) what the relevant health and safety legislation requires for the particular machines to be used

b) what sources of information to use

c) which lines and methods of effective communication to use

d) what the location is of resources you will need

e) what relevant dimensional control aids there are and their uses, eg templates, jigs

f) how to run the machine operating systems

g) how to achieve the correct positioning and securing of tooling

h) what the names, characteristics, uses and limitations are of timber and timber-based materials

i) what the compatibility is of materials with machines

j) what common defects and discrepancies in materials and machines can occur, and how to identify them

k) what the correct use is of relevant lubricants

l) what relevant Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) to use and how to use it correctly

m) what risk assessment techniques should be followed

n) what constitutes the work environment

o) what environment control equipment is used with the machines

p) what documentation requirements you need to follow

SVQs in Furniture 95 November 2010

ELEMENT 228.2 Modify materials to form timber and timber-based products

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Comply with the relevant health and safety legislation throughout the operation of the machinery

2. Ensure that, when necessary, support personnel are in place before and during operations

3. Operate and maintain the machinery in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and industry codes of practice

4. Produce finished machined products which conform to the information requirements

5. Complete the machining operations within the allocated times and operational constraints

6. Take the necessary corrective action in the event of machinery malfunction or material fault

To do this you need to know:

a) what the relevant health and safety legislation requires

b) the particular machine to be used

c) how to interpret specifications

d) what the names, characteristics, uses and limitations are of materials

e) what the names, characteristics, uses and limitations are of sawing, planing and morticing machines

f) what lines and methods of effective communication to use

g) how to run the machine operating systems

h) what the compatibility is of materials with machines

i) how damage can be caused to materials and machines and how to avoid it

j) what the correct use is of relevant lubricants

k) what relevant Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) to use and how to use it correctly

l) what risk assessment techniques are followed

m) what constitutes the work environment

n) what environment control equipment is used with the machines

o) what documentation requirements you need to follow

p) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 96 November 2010

ELEMENT 228.3 Contribute to the provision of a safe work environment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Carry out work practices to keep areas clean, and free from debris and waste, in accordance with the given information

2. Identify potential hazards arising from your work practices, which might affect yourself and others, and take the necessary corrective action

3. Carry out work practices to comply with the given information, to maintain safe and healthy working conditions

To do this you need to know:

a) what your responsibilities with regard to current legislation and official guidance with regard to:

the Health and Safety at Work Act

the Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations

the Manual Handling Operations Regulations

the Personal Protective Equipment at Work Regulations

the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations

the Construction (Health, Safety and Welfare) Regulations

the Provision and Use of Work Equipment Regulations

the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations

company policy regarding legislation and guidance which you should be aware of and observe

b) common forms of accident and health hazard involving employees, occurring on site or in a workshop types of fire control equipment and its use, found on site or in the workshop

c) what safe methods exist for removal and disposal of waste materials/components relating to your occupation and associated occupations from the work area

SVQs in Furniture 97 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 229: Prepare and construct upholstery foundations This Unit addresses the competence required to construct upholstery foundations. This involves:

selecting and applying suspensions that suit load bearing requirements

applying fillings and forming the shape of the item to be upholstered

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 229.1 Apply upholstery suspensions 229.2 Form the shape of upholstered items There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 98 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Conditions The conditions of the frame in terms of its size, the security of

any joints and any irregularities in the wood which might affect the attachment of the suspensions.

Fillings Fillings include fillings such as fabrics, hair, fibres, felts, wadding, feather/down and foam, polyfoam, plastic foam, latex, polyester.

Fixing methods The fixing methods covered by this Unit include stitching, tacking and stapling, using staple guns, upholstery tacks and hammers, upholstery needles and threads.

Problems Problems can arise in relation to the quality, application and positioning of the suspensions and/or in relation to the forming and securing of the fillings to produce the required shape. Problems can arise with edge formation where the scrim is incorrectly tacked or the stitches are of inappropriate tension.

Suspensions Webbings, double and single cone springs and spring units.

Specification The set of details which describe the work to be carried out, including the characteristics of the upholstery fillings to be used, the shape to be produced, the type and dimensions of the item to be upholstered. Specifications may be written and/or presented in the form of a diagram with measurements. The specification may require wooden components to be stripped before the application of upholstery materials.

Stitching Stitching is carried out to form the shape and hold fillings in place and also to form edges and contours.

Upholstery Upholstery is of scroll arms and squab cushions. Panels are of simple and complex shapes.

SVQs in Furniture 99 November 2010

ELEMENT 229.1 Apply upholstery suspensions

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check and confirm that the frame is of an appropriate type, dimension and condition for the upholstering to be carried out

2. Set aside any frames which are of unsuitable condition for upholstering

3. Select suspensions of a suitable type and quantity to meet the load bearing requirements of the item of furniture to be upholstered

4. Space and align the suspensions so that they provide sufficient support to accommodate the upholstery to be carried out

5. Secure the suspensions together as required to meet the load-bearing requirements of the item

6. Secure the suspensions in place using a type and size of fixing that is appropriate to the item and its specification

7. Where springs are being used, use a spring edge construction that is appropriate to the type of furniture, design and required edge detail

8. Make sure that the tensioning of the suspensions is adequate to provide the strength and rigidity of foundation needed by the specification

9. Work in ways that protect yourself and others from risk of injury

10. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems which arise

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

b) why it is important to check the condition of the frame before starting to apply suspensions and what factors would mean that a frame was unsuitable

c) what types of suspensions are used and for what purposes

d) what the principles are behind the spacing and alignment of suspensions

e) why suspensions may need to be secured to each other and the implications of not doing this

f) how to secure suspensions in place and which fixings to use for different types of suspension

g) why suspensions need to be tensioned and the implications of over and under-tensioning

h) what sorts of spring edge construction to use for different situations and why

i) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

j) what kinds of problems can arise with applying suspensions and how to correct them

k) what the current Furnishing Regulations require in terms of suspensions

SVQs in Furniture 100 November 2010

ELEMENT 229.2 Form the shape of upholstered items

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Select fillings that are of suitable quality for the upholstery to be carried out

2. Ensure that you have sufficient fillings to form the shape to the required dimensions

3. Position and form the fillings to the required shape, density and depth

4. Secure the fillings in place using fixing methods which are suited to the type of filling and its location on the item of furniture

5. Make sure that stitchings are of the required length, tension, size and spacing to produce the results required and are securely finished

6. Make sure that your stitching accurately and evenly follows the frame line and the shape required for finished contour lines

7. Work in ways that protect yourself and others from risk of injury

8. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems which arise

9. Secure the undercover so that it lies smooth and even

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

b) what sort of fillings are used in upholstery and for what purposes

c) the handling requirements which apply to different sorts of materials

d) what methods are used to fix fillings in place and when to use them

e) what the implications are of using insufficient fillings, or of applying them unevenly, and how to overcome problems these can cause

f) what the implications are of inappropriate tensioning of stitches and how to overcome problems this can cause

g) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

h) what the current Furnishing Regulations require in terms of the use of different upholstery fillings

i) why an undercover is used and how this is secured

SVQs in Furniture 101 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 230: Produce complex seamed components This Unit addresses the competence required to produce simple seamed components used in upholstery and soft furnishing production by hand and through the use of machinery. This involves:

preparing components and materials

stitching seams to specification

pressing materials before and after stitching to achieve specification

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 230.1 Prepare to produce complex seamed components 230.2 Stitch complex seams to specification There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 102 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Components This Unit covers the making of upholstery and soft furnishing

components which require the use of complex rather than simple seams. Examples could include straight and shaped sews on complex symmetrical or asymmetrical pieces to produce structured forms, seams involving complex pleating, ruching and quilting and the stitching of applied items such as internal zips, other fastenings and pipings.

Materials The different forms of material used in soft furnishings and upholstery. These include materials that are easy to handle and those which require careful handing if sewing is to result in components which are properly aligned, eg patterned/striped, plain/pile, stretch and flat weave fabrics.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

seam stitch length and tensioning is within accepted tolerance

seam type (eg shaped sews) is correct

shape and size measurements are within +/- 3mm tolerance

pleating/ruching/quilting patters applied (eg inverted, kick, pinch pleats) are correct

pleating/quilting dimensions are to within +/- 3mm

the location and orientation of applied items (eg piping, internal zips) is correct

Tools and equipment The hand and machine equipment used within soft furnishing

and upholstery manufacture. Sewing equipment includes lockstitch machines, long arm machines, twin needle machines, overlock machines and multi-needle machines and their various components ie. work-holding devices, needles, thread spools, feet. Hand equipment includes needles, pins, scissors, pinking shears, seam ripper, bodkin, cloth tape measure, tailor‟s chalk, upholstery needle, upholstery skewer. Pressing equipment to include irons and any other pressing equipment.

SVQs in Furniture 103 November 2010

ELEMENT 230.1 Prepare to produce complex seamed components

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check that you have the required tools, equipment and materials to achieve the work specification

2. Check that the materials to be used are of the specified correct colour and type

3. Check that the sewing equipment to be used is in a safe and functional condition and clean of grease and other sources of potential damage to fabric

4. Make sure that the work area is clear and clean

5. Follow the correct procedures to identify and discard any materials that are not to specification

6. Set up sewing machines with the correct work holding devices, needles, feet and thread spools for the work to be carried out

7. Carry out test stitching to confirm that stitch length and fabric reaction are within specifications

8. Follow safe working procedures when setting up and operating sewing equipment

9. Deal promptly with any problems which arise, reporting any which you cannot solve

10. Complete the preparations within the required time

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in describing upholstery and soft furnishing components

b) why it is important to have a clear and clean work area and the consequences of lubricants or debris getting onto materials

c) the functions and uses of the different types of sewing equipment used in upholstery

d) the functions and uses of the different types of foot and needle in use

e) what the implications are of inappropriate tensioning of stitches and how to overcome problems this can cause

f) the functions and uses of the different types of sewing machine components

g) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

h) what your personal limitations are in respect of dealing with problems which can arise

i) the types of equipment fault that can occur and how to recognise and deal with them

j) when and why machine, needle, foot and spool checks are carried out

k) the characteristics of different types of upholstery fabrics and how these affect the preparations that are needed before sewing and the threads to be used

l) when and why to carry out test sews, the types of faults they can show up and what adjustments are needed to deal with them to ensure that complex seamed components can be correctly produced

m) types of fabric, template and lay faults which occur, how they are identified and how they can be dealt with

n) what is an economic time for setting up and preparing to produce complex seamed components

SVQs in Furniture 104 November 2010

ELEMENT 230.2 Stitch complex seams to specification

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Stitch the items in the required sequence and alignment for the component being produced

2. Make sure that seams are of the correct dimension and outline for the component being produced

3. Leave the correct seam allowance and ensure that it is even

4. Use the correct stitch length and structure for the material, component and specification, whether by hand and/or machine

5. Complete the stitching within the required time

6. Deal promptly and effectively with stitching errors

7. Complete the stitched items so that they are ready for use

8. If required, check and confirm that the pressing equipment is clean and ready for use.

9. Use the correct technique for pressing items.

10. Accurately complete quality checks and confirm that they have been met before passing on the work

11. Follow safe working procedures when setting up and operating sewing equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in describing upholstery and soft furnishing components

b) the handling and sewing characteristics of common types of material used in soft furnishings and upholstery

c) the different types of stitching, either hand and/or machine that are used in complex upholstery and soft furnishing seams and when each is used

d) why a seam allowance is left

e) what the implications are of inappropriate tensioning of stitches and how to overcome problems this can cause

f) what sort of stitching errors can occur and how to resolve them

g) why it is important to complete seams by trimming, notching and/or the removal of basting before the component is used

h) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety in the workplace

i) work rates that you are expected to meet

j) when and what type of pressing equipment to use

k) what techniques need to be used when pressing items

l) what quality checks are required

SVQs in Furniture 105 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 231: Make sure your own actions reduce risks to health and safety (HSS1) This Unit is for everyone at work (whether paid, unpaid, full or part-time). It is about having an appreciation of significant risks in your workplace, knowing how to identify and deal with them.

This Unit is about the health and safety responsibilities for everyone in your workplace. It describes the competences required to make sure that:

your own actions do not create any health and safety hazards

you do not ignore significant risks in your workplace, and

you take sensible action to put things right, including: reporting situations which pose a danger to people in the workplace and seeking advice

Fundamental to this Unit is an understanding of the terms "hazard", "risk" and “control”.

SVQs in Furniture 106 November 2010

Performance Criteria:

You must:

Identify the hazards and evaluate the risks in your workplace:

1. identify which workplace instructions are relevant to your job

2. identify those working practices in your job which could harm you or others

3. identify those aspects of your workplace which could harm you or others

4. check which of the potentially harmful working practices and aspects of your workplace present the

highest risks to you or to others

5. deal with hazards in accordance with workplace instructions and legal requirements

6. correctly name and locate the people responsible for health and safety in your workplace

7. report to the people responsible for health and safety in your workplace those hazards which

present the highest risks

Reduce the risks to health and safety in your workplace: 8. carry out your work in accordance with your level of competence, workplace instructions, suppliers

or manufacturers instructions and legal requirements

9. control those health and safety risks within your capability and job responsibilities

10. pass on suggestions for reducing risks to health and safety to the responsible people

11. make sure your behaviour does not endanger the health and safety of you or others in your

workplace

12. follow the workplace instructions and suppliers' or manufacturers' instructions for the safe use of

equipment, materials and products

13. report any differences between workplace instructions and suppliers' or manufacturers' instructions

14. make sure that your personal presentation and behaviour at work:

protects the health and safety of you and others,

meets any legal responsibilities, and

is in accordance with workplace instructions

15. make sure you follow environmentally-friendly working practices

SVQs in Furniture 107 November 2010

Knowledge and Understanding for this Unit You must know and understand:

a. what “hazards” and “risks” are

b. your responsibilities and legal duties for health and safety in the workplace

c. your responsibilities for health and safety as required by the law covering your job role

d. the hazards which exist in your workplace and the safe working practices which you must follow.

e. the particular health and safety hazards which may be present in your own job and the precautions

you must take

f. the importance of remaining alert to the presence of hazards in the whole workplace

g. the importance of dealing with, or promptly reporting, risks

h. the responsibilities for health and safety in your job description

i. the safe working practices for your own job

j. the responsible people you should report health and safety matters to.

k. where and when to get additional health and safety assistance

l. your scope and responsibility for controlling risks

m. workplace instructions for managing risks which you are unable to deal with

n. suppliers‟ and manufacturers‟ instructions for the safe use of equipment, materials and products

which you must follow

o. the importance of personal presentation in maintaining health and safety in your workplace

p. the importance of personal behaviour in maintaining the health and safety of you and others

q. the risks to the environment which may be present in your workplace and/or in your own job

SVQs in Furniture 108 November 2010

Glossary This section provides explanations and definitions of some of the terms used in this Unit.

Control(s)

The means by which the risks identified are eliminated or reduced to acceptable levels.

Employer

A person, firm, association, organisation, company or corporation employing one or more workers and has responsibility for the workplace/work activity.

Hazard* A hazard is something with the potential to cause harm (this can include articles, substances, plant or machines, methods of work, the working environment and other aspects of work management). * Definition taken from: HSE “Management of health and safety at work – Approved Code of Practice & Guidance”. Reference L21 (ISBN 0-7176-2488-9)

Learner Any person in a workplace environment and undertaking learning, including those following a vocational or academic course.

Legislation There are many Acts of Parliament, Statutory Instructions, Regulations and orders relating to health and safety which affect people at work. For example; there are regulations for those who, for example, work with electricity, or work on construction projects, as well as regulations covering noise at work, manual handling, working with VDUs, or dealing with substances hazardous to health, etc. The Health and Safety at Work Act 1974 is the main piece of legislation under which nearly all the other regulations are made.

Manager An individual charged with the responsibility for managing staff, and/or resources and processes.

Other people

Refers to everyone covered by the Health and Safety at Work Act including: visitors, members of the public, colleagues, contractors, clients, customers, patients and students.

Personal presentation this includes personal hygiene, use of personal protective equipment, clothing and accessories suitable to the particular workplace.

Risk*

A risk is the likelihood of potential harm from that hazard being realised.

The extent of the risk depends on: (i) the likelihood of that harm occurring; (ii) the potential severity of that harm, ie of any resultant

injury or adverse health effect; and (iii) the population which might be affected by the hazard, ie

the number of people who might be exposed. * Definition taken from: HSE “Management of health and safety at work – Approved Code of Practice & Guidance”. Reference L21 (ISBN 0-7176-2488-9)

Resources This includes: information, documentation, time, control measures, staff/people, equipment and support (including specialist assistance).

SVQs in Furniture 109 November 2010

Responsible person/ people

The person or people at work to whom any health, safety and welfare issues or hazards should be reported. This could be a supervisor, line manager, director or your employer.

Supervisor One who controls and or directs the work of others

Training Provider An organisation or individual (usually external) responsible for providing the training, work experience, and/or formal assessment for the learner.

Worker

A person performing services for an employer under a contract of service or an apprenticeship. Workers include; outworkers, those employed on a casual basis, in training and volunteers.

Workplace The single or multiple areas in which you carry out your work.

Working practices All activities, procedures, use of materials, substances or equipment and working techniques used in carrying out a work or job related task. This includes procedures for reporting hazards and unsafe working practices.

Workplace instructions

An organisation‟s instructions, method statements, safe systems of work, guidelines and processes on how to behave and perform tasks in the workplace. Within these national occupational standards “Workplace instructions” has been used to include:

POLICIES

A statement which directs the present and future decisions of an organisation.

It is intended to influence and determine decisions, actions, and other matters.

Typically, a policy designates a required process or procedure within an organisation.

They are often initiated because of some external requirement.

PROCEDURES

A series of steps following in a regular definite order that implements a policy

A series of steps or instructions, describing a way of doing things.

A series of steps to be performed in a regular definite order under specified conditions.

Documented processes that are used when work affects more than one function or department of an organisation.

A series of clearly defined steps (and decisions) that explains or describes how one goes about completing a task.

This includes the documentation prepared by the employer about the procedures to be followed for health, safety and welfare matters. This may be the employer‟s safety policy, general health and safety statements and written safety procedures covering aspects of the workplace that should be drawn to the attention of employees and that of everyone covered by the Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974 (visitors, members of the public, colleagues, contractors, clients, customers, patients, students).

Instructions covering, for example:

a) the use of safe working methods and equipment b) the safe use of hazardous substances c) smoking, eating, drinking and drugs d) what to do in the event of an emergency e) personal presentation

SVQs in Furniture 110 November 2010

Commentary for Unit: 235 Finish furniture by hand held spray gun This Unit addresses the competence required to apply finishing processing to hand-crafted furniture. This involves:

preparing work-pieces for finishing

correct and safe use of hand held spray equipment

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 235.1 Prepare work-pieces for finishing 235.2 Apply finishes by spraying There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 111 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Faults The kinds of faults which could occur to work-pieces prior to

treating would include holes, bruising, splits, scratches, dents and the presence of adhesives.

Finish This Unit covers finishes which may be full gloss, mat satin, smooth, open grained and full-grained. Also may including traditional finishes where the „patina‟ needs to be kept.

Materials Primers, fillers, sealers, basecoats, lacquers, thinners they can be based on oil, water or mixed solvents. There may also be need for the use of stains, de-greasing agents, abrasive powders, and cleaning solvents.

Personal Protective Equipment This covers eye protection, gloves, overalls and respiratory equipment as well as barrier, cleansing and after-care creams.

Surface Surfaces may be solid wood, veneered or flat panels and curved work.

Surface defects Types of defects that could occur during application of fillers would include over-thinned fillers, incorrectly mixed fillers and non-removal of excess filler. Types of faults that could occur during spraying could include nibs, holes, scratches, chips, dents, cracks, blisters and blemishes, blooming, blotching, runs streaks, orange peal and fish eye. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and dealing with faults which can be treated readily. If minor, they can be overcome using sanding equipment and abrasives. If major they may require the work-piece to be removed and reported using the correct workplace procedures.

Tools and equipment Tools and equipment include sanding blocks, scrapers, cleaning rags, abrasive papers, abrasive pads, steel wool, tak rags, masking tape, craft knives, filler knives, filters and hand-held spray guns. Control of machine operations is dealt with in another Unit.

Workpiece The item to be treated as part of the finishing process may be a component, sub-assembly or assembly. The work-piece to be treated may be veneered, made of solid wood or of wood composite.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the preparations to be carried out and the type of grain filler and spray materials to be used. The specification will also detail the time within which the process must be completed and the personal protective equipment which should be worn. Specifications may be oral or written and may involve the use of diagrams and colour cards.

SVQs in Furniture 112 November 2010

ELEMENT 235.1 Prepare work-pieces for finishing

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Make sure that you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

3. Check the workpiece and accurately identify any faults that are present

4. Apply the appropriate remedial treatment to any faults that are present

5. Select appropriate materials/fillers for the type of surface

6. Make sure that surfaces are clean and free of dust and debris

7. Make sure that any adhesives left on surfaces are completely removed

8. Make sure that filled surfaces are made level with the surrounding areas

9. Make sure areas of raised grain are re-textured so they blend with the surrounds when the finish is applied

10. Follow safe working procedures when:

lifting and moving heavy items;

handling cleaning agents and abrasives

11. Handle and store the workpiece in ways which protect it from damage

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for hand-crafted furniture

b) what checks are carried out on workpieces which are being prepared for finishing

c) what sorts of faults can occur and how to recognise them

d) what remedial action to take to deal with different types of faults

e) what different preparations are appropriate for surfaces that are made of solid wood and for those that are veneered, including where appropriate traditional finishes

f) which tools and equipment to use to remedy different sorts of faults

g) the types and purpose of fillers and stoppers

h) how to recognise different grades of abrasives and what each is used for

i) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

j) where workpieces should be stored

k) how to protect workpieces during handling and storage

l) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 113 November 2010

ELEMENT 235.2 Apply finishes by spraying

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Ensure that ventilation levels are safe before working with solvent based materials

2. Accurately mask off any surfaces that are not to be sprayed

3. Make sure that surfaces are clean and ready to receive the material

4. Select a nozzle which is suited to the material and finish required

5. Check and confirm that the spray gun is free from contamination before charging it with the required materials

6. Apply the spray from a suitable distance from the workpiece

7. Adjust your spraying technique as necessary to achieve the required finish

8. Apply the finish uniformly to the required build and depth of colour

9. Deal promptly with faults which occur during the spraying process

10. Deal promptly and safely with spillages and splashes

11. Allow specified drying times between multiple coats

12. Make sure that surfaces are clean and free of excess materials and surface irregularities between multiple coats, and on completion

13. Follow safe working procedures when handling materials and using powered equipment

14. Make sure that unused materials are accurately labelled and return them to the designated storage areas

15. Dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures and disposal areas

16. Transfer the finished workpiece to the designated storage location

17. Complete the process within the required time

18. Complete production records accurately and clearly

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for materials used in making hand-crafted furniture

b) the different types of materials used, what each is for and when it is used

c) what the drying times are of different materials and why it is important to allow these to lapse before applying additional coats

d) how and why variations in spraying techniques influence the results produced

e) what kinds of faults can occur in the application of coatings and what steps can be taken to deal with them

f) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

g) what personal protective equipment should be worn when handling coating materials and why

h) why it is important to deal promptly, safely and correctly with splashes and spillages of materials

i) why it is important that waste materials, including rags, are disposed of safely

j) what information is recorded on production records and why it is important that these are kept up to date and accurate

k) work rates that you are expected to meet

l) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 114 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 236: Maintain tools and equipment used in furniture making and installation This Unit addresses the competence required to maintain hand tools and equipment used in the making and installation of furniture. This involves:

checking the condition of tools

carrying out routine maintenance

bringing tools into working condition

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 236.1 Check and maintain the condition of hand tools 236.2 Bring tools into working condition There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 115 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Damage Damage can arise from wear, misuse or from faults in the

materials being worked. Examples might include blunting and notching of cutting edges, missing or bent teeth on saws or frayed or cut electric cables.

Sharpening Sharpening is carried out using grinding stones, strops, files and slip stones. It is expected that care and maintenance of tools should reflect those in general use within the craft. For example furniture makers may be required to use sharpening techniques using traditional oil stones for producing a sharpening angle to edges such as mortice, firmer and bevel edge chisels, smoothing and block planes. Fine tuning of hand tools such as castings and components of planes may be required for traditional furniture making crafts which involve working to fine tolerances.

Techniques Sharpening, honing, grinding and fettling.

Tools and equipment Hand tools, electric and air-powered tools, measuring devices, workshop tools, devices and equipment. Furniture making crafts may be required to sharpen a range of hand tools which could include: knives, planes, chisels, scrapers, gauges and turning and carving tools.

Personal protective equipment (PPE)

Ear, eye and respiratory protection as well as protective gloves and footwear.

Working condition The level of sharpness and performance accuracy needed to produce hand-crafted furniture accurately and to a high quality finish. Typically this involves tolerances of within +/- 2mm for sharp edges, +/- 2 degrees for angles and sharpness of drill bits.

SVQs in Furniture 116 November 2010

ELEMENT 236.1 Check and maintain the condition of tools

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check the condition of tools on a regular basis

2. Sharpen cutting edges to keep them in effective working condition as required for your craft

3. Oil and grease tools as required to prevent them being damaged and to maintain their effectiveness

4. Keep tools clean and free from dust and debris

5. Accurately identify tools that are damaged and remove them for repair

6. Make sure that tools are stored away safely and tidily in the designated locations when not in use

7. Follow safe working practices when handling tools, equipment, oils and greases

8. Wear the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) for the work you are doing

To do this you need to know

a) the different sorts of tools that are used in making and installation components by hand

b) what to look for when checking the condition of different sorts of tools

c) what the implications are of not keeping cutting edges sharp

d) where and how often to oil and grease tools and what sorts of oils/greases to use

e) what the implications are of not keeping tools clean and free of dust and debris

f) why it is important to put tools away properly

g) how to recognise tools that are damaged and need more than routine maintenance to bring them into working condition

h) the types of damage that can occur to tools and how to recognise them

i) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

j) the potential hazards that can arise from defective and faulty tools

SVQs in Furniture 117 November 2010

ELEMENT 236.2 Bring tools into working condition

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Make an accurate assessment of what needs to be done to bring the tool back into working condition

2. Promptly report any tools which are beyond repair

3. Use the appropriate equipment and techniques to achieve the required tolerances

4. Use suitable tests to check the condition of the tool

5. Confirm that the tool is of the required sharpness and performance accuracy before returning it as ready for use

6. Follow safe working practices when handling tools and materials

7. Wear the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) for the work you are doing

To do this you need to know

a) the different sorts of tools that are used in making wooden furniture by hand

b) what to look for when assessing the condition of different sorts of tools and what needs to be done to bring them into working state

c) what the implications are of not keeping cutting edges sharp

d) the purpose of different materials and techniques and when to use them

e) the types of damage that can occur to tools and how to recognise damage that can be repaired as well as damage that cannot be repaired

f) how to test tools for sharpness and performance accuracy

g) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

h) the potential hazards that can arise from defective and faulty tools

SVQs in Furniture 118 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 237: Prepare resources for use in making hand-crafted furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare the different sorts of resources that will be used in the making of hand-crafted furniture. This involves:

checking the condition and suitability of materials

marking out materials

preparing surfaces

identifying and preparing different tools and equipment needed for the operations to be carried out

selecting and preparing wood working adhesives

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 237.1 Select and prepare equipment, tools and the work area 237.2 Select and prepare materials and surfaces 237.3 Select and prepare adhesives There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 119 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards.

Adhesives There are a range of adhesives in common commercial use

within hand-crafted furniture production. They include polyvinyl acetate, urea or phenol formaldehydes, animal based glues, resorcinol, epoxy resins and cyanide acrylic base compounds. Many can pose significant risks to health and safety. These will have been taken account of in the risk assessments and procedures set in place to conform to COSHH legislation and which a competent person will follow in full.

Environmental conditions The cleanliness, temperature, ventilation and humidity characteristics of the working area.

Materials The materials used in constructing hand-crafted furniture. These include softwoods (eg pine), hardwoods (eg mahogany) and wood composites (typically plywood, chipboard and MDF). Materials also include mouldings, fittings, ground work and components such as dowelling used in joint making.

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Ear, eye and respiratory protection as well as protective gloves, overalls, footwear, and barrier, cleansing and after-care cream.

Specifications Specifications are details as to the work to be carried out and the materials, adhesives, tools, equipment and work area selection and preparations needed.

Surface finish Smooth, planed and sanded surface finishes will be needed, depending on the intended use of the material within the furniture item.

Techniques Sawing, planing, sanding and jointing.

Tools and equipment The chisels, planes, cramps, saws, drills, drill bits, squares, mallets, scrapers, honing stones, knives and measuring devices used in the making of hand-crafted furniture. Also includes powered tools such as sanders, routers, drills and power saws as well as workshop tools and devices such as bench hooks, shooting boards, mitre blocks of different angles, scratch stock. Drill bits, work holding devices, chucks and key, blades and abrasives.

SVQs in Furniture 120 November 2010

ELEMENT 237.1 Prepare equipment, tools and the work area

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Select the correct tools and equipment to carry out the work specified

2. Check and confirm that the tools and equipment are in working condition and set aside any that are not

3. Make sure that the correct equipment components are selected and set in place

4. Make sure that equipment is correctly set up for operation and that guards are in place

5. Select and lay out any workshop devices that will be needed to complete the specified work

6. Clear and clean adequate working space for the tools and equipment to be used and the work to be done

7. Make sure that environmental conditions are suitable for the work to be carried out

8. Handle tools and equipment safely

To do this you need to know:

a) the different sorts of workshop tools, equipment and devices that are used in making wooden furniture by hand

b) what to look for when checking the condition of tools and equipment

c) what components are needed to achieve different specifications and what the implications are of using the wrong components

d) what the implications are of setting up equipment incorrectly

e) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

SVQs in Furniture 121 November 2010

ELEMENT 237.2 Select and prepare materials and surfaces

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Make sure that you have clear and complete details of the required materials and preparations

3. Select materials of the required types and dimensions

4. Check and confirm that the selected materials are free of irregularities and in a suitable condition to be worked on

5. Determine the face side of the material to be used for the best match to:

structural requirements;

the desired visual effect

6. Accurately measure the material to the required tolerances, keeping wastage as low as possible

7. Make all markings clearly and cleanly

8. Use the appropriate technique and tools to produce the required surface finish

9. Follow safe working procedures and wear the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) for the technique being used

10. Return tools to the correct storage locations when not in use and report any which require maintenance

To do this you need to know:

a) the different sorts of workshop tools and devices that are used in making wooden furniture by hand

b) what sorts of materials, tools and techniques are used for making hand-crafted furniture and why

c) why the face mark is used, what it is used for and why it relates to the movement of timber

d) how to identify the face side of material and why correct and accurate surface preparation is important

e) what the growth characteristics are of different hard and soft woods and what implications this has for how to work with them

f) what the handling characteristics are of different sorts of wood composites and what implications this has for how to work with them

g) how to handle materials without causing damage

h) units of measurement used to specify length, width, thickness and performance accuracy and the tolerance levels typically used in hand-crafted furniture

i) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

SVQs in Furniture 122 November 2010

ELEMENT 237.3 Select and prepare adhesives

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Wear the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) for the adhesive to be used

2. Check that the specified adhesives are available and in date

3. Select adhesives which match the specification characteristics

4. Ensure that extraction facilities are operating effectively before working with adhesives which require you to take this precaution

5. Immediately report any problems with extraction and ventilation facilities

6. Mix the adhesives to the specified consistency and in the required volume

7. Maintain the adhesives in the required condition until needed

8. Deal promptly and safely with spillages and splashes

9. Follow COSHH procedures when handling adhesives

10. Make sure that unused materials are accurately labelled and return them to the designated storage areas

11. Dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures and disposal areas

To do this you need to know:

a) the different sorts of adhesives that are used in making wooden furniture by hand and what each is used for

b) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment and control measures that have been set by your organisation

c) why it is so important to comply fully with COSHH procedures

d) the pot life, shelf life and open time, curing time and clamping time of different adhesives and their implications for your work

e) how to tell when the required consistency has been achieved and what actions are needed to keep adhesives in working condition

f) what personal protective equipment (PPE) should be worn when handling adhesives and why

g) why it is important to deal promptly, safely and correctly with splashes and spillages of adhesives

h) why it is important that waste materials are disposed of safely

i) who you should report any problems with the extraction and ventilation to

j) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 123 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 239: Finish hand-crafted furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to apply hand-finishing polishes, waxes, oils, varnishes and lacquers to hand-crafted furniture. This involves:

preparing finishes for use

applying finishes to surfaces

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 239.1 Prepare oils, polishes, varnishes, waxes and lacquers for use 239.2 Apply oils, polishes, varnishes, waxes and lacquers There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 124 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Faults The kinds of faults that can occur include chilling, blushing

and flow-out.

Finish This Unit covers finishes used in hand-crafted furniture, including traditional polishes, varnishes, oils, waxes, clear and pigmented lacquers.

Materials In addition to the finishes, thinning and cleaning solvents, there may be a need to use burnishing creams, bleaches and de-greasing agents.

Personal Protective Equipment This covers eye protection, gloves, overalls and respiratory equipment as well as barrier, cleansing and after-care creams.

Techniques Finishes are applied using brushing, rubbering, stiffing, dulling out, burnishing and were applicable hand spraying.

Tools and equipment Finishing involves the use of abrasives, brushes, rubbers, abrasive pads, wire wools, cloths and tak rags.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the finishes to be used, the number of coats of finish to be applied and the desired sheen to be achieved. The specification will also detail the time within which the process must be completed and the personal protective equipment which should be worn. Specifications may be oral or written and may involve the use of diagrams and colour cards.

SVQs in Furniture 125 November 2010

ELEMENT 239.1 Prepare oils, polishes, varnishes, waxes and lacquers for use

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Make sure that you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

3. Make sure that the work environment is clean and free from debris and dust

4. Mix the finish to the required volume, colour, consistency and viscosity

5. Work in ways that prevent contamination of the finish

6. Make sure that the finish is adequately filtered to remove any contamination and irregularities

7. Use the appropriate standards to confirm that you have produced the correct colour and shade of finish

8. Store and maintain the finish in a suitable condition for use

9. Carry out the appropriate tests to confirm that the working characteristics and results produced by the finish meet the specification

10. Follow COSHH procedures at all times, and wear the appropriate personal protective equipment for the materials

11. Make sure that unused finishes are accurately labelled and return them to the designated storage areas

12. Dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures and disposal areas

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical and manufacturers‟ specifications and data sheets on finishes for hand-crafted furniture

b) what checks are carried out on work-pieces which are being prepared for finishing

c) what sorts of problems can occur in preparing finishes of different sorts, and how to recognise and deal with them

d) what the shelf-life is of different finishes

e) how to handle different finishes to produce the required specification

f) why it is important to turn finishes regularly so that they are brought into the required suspension

g) the implications for your work of the HASAWA COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

h) where and how finishes should be stored and the implications of not doing this

i) why it is important to label unused materials correctly

SVQs in Furniture 126 November 2010

ELEMENT 239.2 Apply oils, polishes, varnishes, waxes and lacquers

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Make sure that the surfaces are free of dust and grease ready to accept the finish

2. Apply the finish so that an even coverage is achieved

3. Use an effective technique for the kind of finish

4. Allow sufficient drying times between multiple coats

5. Clear surfaces of excess finish at each stage of the process

6. De-nib, remove blemishes and flat back finish between successive coats

7. Handle and protect the item of furniture from damage during finishing

8. Deal promptly and safely with spillages and splashes

9. Deal promptly and effectively with application faults

10. Follow COSHH procedures at all times and wear appropriate personal protective equipment for the materials being handled

11. Make sure that unused materials are accurately labelled and return them to the designated storage areas

12. Dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures and disposal areas

13. Complete each coat within the working time of the material

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for finishing hand-crafted furniture

b) The different types of abrasive materials used on finishes

c) the different types of finish used, what each is for and when it is used

d) what the drying and working times are of different finishes

e) what the effects are of moisture content on the finish

f) what the implications are of poor technique

g) what kinds of application faults can arise and what to do to resolve them

h) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

i) what personal protective equipment should be worn when handling stains and why

j) why the working environment needs to be at suitable levels of humidity, temperature and lighting as well as dust-free and adequately ventilated

k) why it is important to deal promptly, safely and correctly with splashes and spillages

l) why it is important to label unused materials clearly and accurately

m) what the storage requirements are for different types of finish and the implications of not storing them correctly

SVQs in Furniture 127 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 240: Upholster standard items of traditional furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to upholster items of traditional furniture. The Unit involves:

preparing, cutting and applying upholstery materials

trimming and finishing items of traditionally upholstered furniture

maintaining your own and others‟ safety while working There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 240.1 Fit materials to an item of traditionally upholstered furniture 240.2 Finish an item of traditionally upholstered furniture There is also a scope statement, which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 128 November 2010

Scope statement The following items have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Item to be upholstered The items to be upholstered could include any of the following:

Traditional furniture such as an armchair, which may or may not include wings

Settee

Child‟s chair

Upholstery materials The different forms of materials used to provide padding within an upholstered item and for top covers and finishing. These include a range of different fabric types used to provide upholstery covers, including materials that require careful handling and where alignment and tensioning may require skill to achieve, eg patterned/stripped fabrics, plain pile, vinyl, stretch fabrics and flat weave fabrics, as well as natural hide and where the specification calls for a pleated cover shape. In addition, materials include fillings such as hair/fibre as well as finishing materials used in edging, trimmings and linings and for the covering of buttons.

Component The support and suspension materials used in upholstery and which require to be fixed to the frame to provide the shape and support needed. These include webbing, fibre insulation pads, platforms, springs and spring systems, traditional fillings such as hair/fibre, wadding. They may be fixed in place using staples or upholstery tacks, nails and proprietary fixings.

Tools and equipment Hammers, staplers and staple removers, knives, shears and scalpels, stretching devices.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used, the quality of outcome to be achieved and time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

All fixed components are secure

Components should be accurately centred and evenly spaced

Materials should be cut and shaped to conform to the specified design profiles

Visual appearance (including alignment of top fabrics and spacing of tacks, staples etc.)

Problems In relation to preparatory work, these will be to do with non-

functional or missing tools or equipment and/or missing, mismatched, damaged or unsuitable materials and components. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rejecting, replacing or rectifying these sorts of problems, reporting them when they cannot be dealt with quickly, safely and readily. In relation to the securing of covers and other finishings, these will be to do with misalignment, incorrect tensioning, shaping errors, marks on the materials and/or insecure or ineffective ancillary fittings.

SVQs in Furniture 129 November 2010

ELEMENT 240.1 Fit material to an item of traditionally upholstered furniture

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

2. Deal promptly with any problems that arise with the tools, equipment and materials, reporting any which you cannot solve

3. Make sure that the item to be upholstered is protected from damage while it is being worked on

4. Accurately position the upholstery material, checking that the alignment is correct, before cutting it as required to fit the item

5. Secure the cover firmly, tensioning it to the required level

6. Make adjustments as necessary to make sure that the visual appearance, fixing and tensioning of the cover conforms to the specification

7. Secure the bottom cloth firmly and accurately to conform to visual and safety requirements

8. Follow safe working procedures when:

Using sharp tools and items of equipment

Using powered equipment

Lifting and moving heavy items

9. Complete the preparations within the required time

10. Keep the work area tidy

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different types of materials used as upholstery covers and bottom cloths

b) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

c) the steps and actions needed to position and fit covers to different types of item

d) how to measure and cut upholstery cover materials to ensure an accurate fit within an economic level of wastage

e) when to use different methods to secure upholstery covers

f) the importance and use of the bottom cloth in upholstery

g) the sorts of problems that can occur during fitting covers to upholstered items and how to deal with them to meet the specification

h) the functions of the different types of tools and equipment that are used in upholstery

i) how to handle sharp and powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

j) the implications of your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

k) the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

l) why it is important to keep to time schedules

SVQs in Furniture 130 November 2010

ELEMENT 240.2 Finish an item of traditionally upholstered furniture

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately position any specified trimmings and finishings

2. Fix securely any specified trimmings and finishings

3. Check and confirm that the required quality outcome has been achieved before reporting work

as complete

4. Place completed item in a designated location and position for safe storage

5. Deal promptly with any problems that occur

6. Report any problems that you cannot solve

7. Complete the process within the required time

8. Follow safe working procedures when:

Using sharp tools and items of equipment

Using powered equipment

Lifting and moving heavy items

9. Keep the work area tidy and protect the item from damage while it is being worked on

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

b) the steps and actions needed to position and fit trimmings and finishings to different types of item

c) why it is important to check and confirm that the required quality outcome has been achieved

before reporting the item as finished

d) the sorts of problems that can occur and how to deal with them to meet the specification, and

who to report unsolvable problems to

e) the functions of the different types of tools and equipment that are used in upholstery

f) how to handle sharp and powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and other from risk

g) the implications of your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

h) the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

i) why it is important to keep to time schedules

SVQs in Furniture 131 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 241: Create decorative effects on hand-crafted furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to create decorative effects on hand-crafted furniture. This involves:

preparing materials and surfaces to take the finish

using a range of specialist techniques

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 241.1 Prepare surfaces and decorative materials 241.2 Create decorative effects on furniture There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 132 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Decorative effects These include distressing, antiquing, stippling, marbling,

dragging, rag-rolling, sponging and graining. Decorative material(s) This Unit covers the paints, stipples, glazes, varnishes

and pigments used in creating a range of decorative effects on hand-crafted furniture. They may be based on oil, water or spirit as the solvent. Masking materials are tapes and liquids.

Tools and equipment Decorative effects are applied by hand, involving the use of cloths, brushes, rags, pads, sponges, sacking and tak rags for the removal of dust. The Unit also covers the skills needed to use hand sanding machines, steel wool, an iron, abrasive sheets, scrapers and sanding blocks to achieve particular surface finishes.

Faults Types of faults that could occur during application of materials would include marking of the surface, drip, runs, streaks, mismatched shading, over working or inappropriate surface finish. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and dealing with faults which can be treated readily if responded to promptly. Problems which cannot be resolved in that way would be reported using the correct workplace procedures.

Personal protective equipment This covers eye protection, gloves, overalls and respiratory equipment as well as barrier, cleansing and after-care creams

Surface Surfaces may be solid wood, veneered, particle board, flat panels, curves and turns. The surfaces may be part of a component, sub-assembly or assembly used in hand-crafted furniture.

Surface faults The sorts of surface faults that might adversely affect the finish needed would include nibs, holes, scratches, chips, dents, cracks, blisters and blemishes

Work Specification The set of instructions which describe the type of decorative effects to be achieved. Specifications may be oral or written and may involve the use of diagrams and colour cards.

SVQs in Furniture 133 November 2010

ELEMENT 241.1 Prepare surfaces and decorative materials

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Make sure that you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

3. Make sure that surfaces are clean and free of surface faults which mean that they are not in a suitable condition for the decorative effect required

4. Select materials which are suitable for the decorative effect and finish to be achieved

5. Accurately match materials against the colour specification

6. Make sure that you have enough of the material to complete the work before starting

7. Where necessary, mix and thin the materials to the required handling consistency and quality for the finish to be produced

8. Follow COSHH procedures at all times and wear appropriate personal protective equipment for the materials being handled

9. Deal promptly and safely with spillages and splashes

10. Dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures and disposal areas

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for decorative effects and finishes

b) the different types of materials used, what each is for and when it is used

c) what the implications are of using materials that are inappropriate for the finish to be produced

d) why it is important to be accurate when checking against a colour specification

e) when and why it may be necessary to mix and/or thin materials to achieve a suitable consistency and/or colour for the finish to be produced

f) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

g) what personal protective equipment should be worn when handling decorative materials and why

h) why it is important to deal promptly, safely and correctly with splashes and spillages

i) where and how to dispose of wastes and why it is important that this is done safely

SVQs in Furniture 134 November 2010

ELEMENT 241.2 Create decorative effects on furniture

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Use an effective technique for the kind of decorative effect and finish required

3. Follow an effective sequence for effects and finishes which require multiple treatments

4. Use tools and equipment efficiently, effectively and safely

5. Deal promptly and effectively with application faults which occur

6. Deal promptly and safely with spillages and splashes

7. Allow specified drying times between multiple coats

8. Make sure that surfaces are clean and free of excess materials and surface irregularities between multiple applications of materials

9. Check and confirm that the results meet the specification before passing the work on as finished

10. Follow COSHH procedures at all times and wear appropriate personal protective equipment for the materials being handled

11. Make sure that unused materials are accurately labelled and return them to the designated storage areas

12. Dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures and disposal areas

13. Complete the process within the working time of the decorative material

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for decorative effects and finishes

b) the different types of materials used, what each is for and when it is used

c) what the drying and working times are of different materials

d) what is involved in the techniques associated with different decorative effects and finishes

e) what different tools and equipment and used and the purpose of each

f) what sort of application faults can arise, what causes them and how to deal with them

g) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

h) what personal protective equipment should be worn when handling materials and why

i) why it is important to deal promptly, safely and correctly with splashes and spillages

j) why it is important to label unused materials clearly and accurately

k) what the storage requirements are for different types of material and the implications of not storing them correctly

SVQs in Furniture 135 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 247: Produce upholstery templates This Unit addresses the competence required to produce upholstery templates. This involves:

determining the details of the templates from the specification

accurately marking out and measuring template dimensions

cutting out templates using appropriate tools and equipment

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 247.1 Collect information and materials for producing upholstery templates 247.2 Produce upholstery templates There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 136 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Conditions The conditions under which templates are stored would

normally require them to be kept flat and with protection provided to ensure that they do not become marked or their edges get damaged through contact with other items and activities in the workshop.

Materials Templates may be made of fabric or of firmer material such as paper, card, plywood or plastic.

Problems Problems relate to the template being difficult to use and/or producing an inaccurate result. Depending on the nature and severity of the problem, they can be overcome by altering the design or specification of the template, making it from different materials and/or using different tools, equipment and techniques.

Template The pattern or model from which upholstery fabric will be cut. This Unit covers the making of templates of different shapes and sizes, involving curves and straight edges.

Tools and equipment This Unit covers the use of measuring equipment such as rulers, measuring tapes, protractors and straight edges plus hand and powered cutting equipment such as knives, scissors, scroll and jig saws.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the characteristics and dimensions of the upholstery fabric to be used, the item to be upholstered and whether it is intended that the template be for a one-off purpose or multiple uses. Specifications may be written and/or presented in the form of a diagram with measurements.

SVQs in Furniture 137 November 2010

ELEMENT 247.1 Collect information and materials for producing upholstery templates

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

2. Confirm any unusual or unclear aspects of the specification before you begin

3. Determine the relevant materials and tools required to produce the template and ensure they are available for use

4. Collect the required materials and tools for producing the templates

5. Ensure tools and equipment are in working order, reporting any problems to the appropriate person

6. Prepare you work area for the intended work to be done

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

b) which tools and equipment to use to cut different template materials

c) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

d) how to use cutting equipment in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

e) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details control measures that have been set by your organisation

f) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

SVQs in Furniture 138 November 2010

ELEMENT 247.2 Produce upholstery templates

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately measure and mark out the template to the required dimensions to achieve the specification

2. Make sure that the template allows a sufficient tolerance for the type of fabric and purpose for which it will be used

3. Cut the template safely and efficiently using tools and equipment which are appropriate for the material

4. Make sure that fixing and cutting directions on the template are marked clearly, using industry recognised conventions

5. Make sure that edges are clean and free of damage which could affect the accuracy of the template’s use

6. Label the template with clear and accurate identification details

7. Store the template under suitable conditions to protect it from damage

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

b) what different types of materials are used in making templates and the benefits and drawbacks of each

c) what tolerances should be built into template measurements and why

d) which tools and equipment to use to cut different template materials

e) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

f) how to use cutting equipment in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

g) why it is important to make sure that the template edges are clean and damage free and what actions to take to achieve this when cutting different template materials

h) labelling conventions used in the furniture and furnishing industry

i) what information is included on template labelling and why

j) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details control measures that have been set by your organisation

k) what kind of storage conditions are appropriate for different template materials and why

SVQs in Furniture 139 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 248: Assess and repair items of furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to strip down an item of furniture ready for work to be carried out on it. This Unit is particularly relevant to work in upholstery, repair and restoration contexts. The Unit involves

Assessing an item of furniture for repair

Repairing furniture components There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 248.1 Asses an item of furniture for repair 248.2 Repair removed components There is also a scope statement, which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 140 November 2010

Scope statement The following items have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Component Components include solid, structural components (eg a door

frame, part of the carcase of a chair) and upholstery components (eg fillings, top cover). Components may be fragile in that they can be easily damaged (eg certain cloths, antique items) and may need special protective measures to be taken. More robust components may still need careful handling, but do not require any special treatment.

Tools and equipment The tools and equipment used for stripping down an item of furniture including a variety of hand tools. Hammers, staplers and staple removers, knives, shears and scalpels, stretching devices. Stripping methods would include either hand methods — solvents/scrap or dipping methods — hot/cold, depending on the item to be stripped. This also includes preservation and frame treatments, eg. for infestation.

Item of furniture Any item of furniture, whether modern or traditional, which needs to be stripped down in order for repairs to be made to structural aspects and/or to upholstery.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the area of the item to be repaired down, if not the whole item, and any special handling and/or storage instructions specified by the client ordering the work to be done, or the organisation.

Personal Protective Equipment The personal protective equipment (PPE) provided by the employer for use in carrying out various activities for which a risk assessment has identified that PPE is needed. These include items of clothing that protect the wearer‟s eyes, lungs, skin and clothing. They would be particularly necessary when dealing with older furniture, which is made of materials which have deteriorated and/or finishes which might be toxic.

Problems In relation to preparatory work, these will be to do with non-functional or missing tools or equipment and/or missing, mismatched, damaged or unsuitable materials and components. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rejecting, replacing or rectifying these sorts of problems, reporting them when they cannot be dealt with quickly, safely and readily.

SVQs in Furniture 141 November 2010

ELEMENT 248.1 Assess an item of furniture for repair

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Obtain the specification for the work and identify the components that need repair

2. Note any customer requirements for carrying out the work, such as use of original materials

3. Handle and examine the item without causing further damage or degradation

4. Accurately identify any vulnerabilities in the item of furniture which will need to be addressed

and report these to the relevant person

5. Use valid and reliable sources of information and expert advice as required to identify and obtain

the required materials

6. Identify and obtain the required tools and equipment to carry out the repair

To do this you need to know

a) the factors that should be taken into consideration when assessing an item for furniture for repair

b) how to identify the construction methods and materials used in items of furniture from different historical periods and countries of origin

c) what steps to take to avoid causing damage and degradation to an item of furniture

d) what to look for when assessing how vulnerable the item is to continuing degradation

e) why it is helpful to identify the causes of damage and degradation so these can be taken into account when considering repair requirements

f) how to identify the signs of common forms of deterioration in items of furniture

g) why you should keep a record of your assessment

h) how to provide clear information to a customer, what type of information they need, and why it could be important to them

i) the source of suitable materials and equipment for conducting repairs

SVQs in Furniture 142 November 2010

ELEMENT 248.2 Repair removed components

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Apply any necessary preservation treatments to the original frame

2. Accurately cut and shape components according to the work specification

3. Accurately position appropriate components to provide the structure and shape specified

4. Fix appropriate components and/or upholstery materials securely using the correct fixings for the

type of component

5. Check and confirm that the quality is as specified

6. Deal promptly with any problems that occur, and report those that you cannot solve to the

appropriate person

7. Follow safe working procedures at all times

8. Keep the work area tidy and protect the item from damage while it is being worked on

9. Complete the process within a required time

To do this you need to know

a) the handling characteristics and functions of the different types of components

b) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications

c) how to measure, cut and fix components to give the specified structure and shape

d) when to use different methods to secure components

e) the sorts of problems that can occur and how to deal with them to meet the specification

f) who to report unsolvable problems to

g) the functions of the different types of tools and equipment that are used in upholstery

h) how to handle sharp and powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and other from risk

i) the implications of your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find

out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your

organisation

j) the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

k) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 143 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 249: Work effectively in a furniture-related commercial environment This Unit addresses the competence required to work effectively within any commercial environment in the furniture, furnishings and interiors industry. This involves:

planning and organising your own work

improving your own skills and development There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 249.1 Organise your work 249.2 Improve your performance There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 144 November 2010

Scope statements

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Procedures Organisational specifications of how to carry out work activities

in a manner that will ensure the required outcomes if the procedure is followed accurately.

Resources A range of resources are used in any activity. These could include:

information, documentation and specifications

materials

tools

equipment

Work Objectives This Unit is suitable for any aspect of work within the furniture, furnishings and interiors industry. Objectives are typically described in terms of the following considerations:

quantity

quality

cost

time

safety, health and environment

Others/appropriate person People who are either working with the individual or are directly affected by his/her work. This includes colleagues and line management.

Feedback Information that is given from others that could be used to assess progress/achievement of objectives.

Problems Problems in working relations may be solved by you, or you may need to refer to others for additional help and support.

Work area The work area is any area where the individual is working, either on a temporary or permanent basis.

SVQs in Furniture 145 November 2010

ELEMENT 249.1 Organise your work

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check that you have all of the required resources before beginning your work

2. When necessary work with others to achieve the work objectives that you have been set

3. Work safely and efficiently at all times

4. Fulfil your responsibilities on time and to quality standards

5. Keep your work area in a tidy and organised state

6. Take appropriate action to solve problems

7. Report any problems that cannot be readily solved to the right person.

To do this you need to know:

a) the principles of sustainable furniture manufacture and good practice

b) what procedures need to be followed to obtain resources that you will need to complete your work objectives

c) what safety, health and environment hazards are associated with the resources you use and what risk control procedures are you required to follow

d) why it is important to make sure you have a correct understanding of what you are to do

e) when and why it may be necessary to work with others to achieve work objectives that have been set

f) why it is important to work safely at all times

g) why it is important to keep the work area clean and tidy

h) how to solve typical problems and who to report unsolvable problems to

i) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 146 November 2010

ELEMENT 249.2 Improve your performance

In carrying out this work you must:

1. objectively assess your own skills, knowledge and expertise against an expected standard, and /or work objectives

2. respond appropriately to feedback from others on how well your own skills, knowledge and expertise match the expected standards/ work objectives that are required

3. identify areas for development to maintain and/or increase your own skills, knowledge and expertise

4. inform the appropriate person about any areas of development that you have identified

To do this you need to know:

a) what level/standard/objective you will be expected to work to

b) ways of objectively assessing your own skills and expertise against an agreed standard/objective

c) methods of seeking feedback from others on how well your skills, knowledge and expertise match the agreed standard/objective

d) the appropriate response to feedback and appraisal of your performance at work

e) how to identify areas for development and/or improvement in your skills, knowledge and expertise

f) who to inform about any further development you might need

SVQs in Furniture 147 November 2010

Unit 250: Produce table treatments This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare components and produce a standard table treatment. This involves:

measuring and cutting fabric to make a table cover and/or runner

sewing the components to make a table cover and/or runner

trimming and finishing the table cover and/or runner

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety

There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 250.1 Prepare components for a table treatment 250.2 Sew a table treatment 250.3 Finish a table treatment There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 148 November 2010

Scope statement

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Components The pieces of material from which a table treatment is

fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. Examples of sewing method could include straight, shaped sews and seams involving simple pleating.

Fabrics The different forms of material used for making table treatments. These include a range of different fabric, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics with a minimum pattern repeat of 25cm, plain and patterned pile, flat weave fabrics.

Fixing methods This Unit covers the use of hand sewing, including slip stitch, ladder stitch and hemming stitch. Machine sewing including flat, french and flat fell seams.

Problems In relation to the cutting of fabrics, these will be to do with flaws, distortions and colour/pattern variations in the fabric, inaccurate measurements and mis-alignments. In relation to the assembly and sewing process, these will be to do with slipping, fraying, inaccuracies, poor seam quality and equipment faults. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rectifying these types of problems in ways which ensure that the quality of the outcome is not compromised.

Sewing This Unit covers both machine and hand sewing. Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be

carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material cutting and shaping accuracy is to within +/- 5mm, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting

component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm

Trimmings and Decorative Finishes This Unit covers the assembly and/or fixing of piping, braids, fringes, cords, flange cords and braids, applied and inserted into seams, hand and machine sewn. This Unit also includes the use of other decorative detailing, eg pleating, gathering, appliqué, tucks, smocking.

Tools and equipment This Unit covers the use of cutting, measuring and marking equipment and both hand sewing equipment including scissors, pins, needles, thread, tailor‟s chalk and sewing machines.

SVQs in Furniture 149 November 2010

ELEMENT 250.1 Prepare components for a table treatment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep the work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

3. Plan the cutting of the fabric so as to minimise waste and take account of the design characteristics and handling implications of the fabric to be used

4. Measure and mark out the components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits for the fabric being used

5. Ensure fabric placement and alignment is appropriate for the type and number of components required and the fabric characteristics

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

7. Follow safe working procedures when using sharp tools and items of equipment

8. Protect the fabric from damage while it is being worked on

9. Make sure that the components are clearly and accurately marked where necessary

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for table treatments

b) the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials used in table treatments

c) how many measurements and of which dimension are needed to ensure accurate cutting and fitting in respect of different types of component

d) which markers are most appropriate to use for different types of fabric

e) what cutting tolerances are appropriate for different types of component and in what ways this may be influenced by fabric type

f) what the implications are of not properly placing and aligning fabric before cutting it

g) why it is important to minimise waste

h) how to take account of design characteristics such as pattern repeats and pile direction in planning cutting

i) the sorts of problems that can occur during marking out and cutting fabric and how to deal with them

j) the functions and uses of the different types of measuring and marking tools

k) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

l) what steps should be taken to protect fabric from damage

SVQs in Furniture 150 November 2010

ELEMENT 250.2 Sew a standard table treatment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately place all materials and components in their correct position

2. Make sure that components are correctly orientated and aligned to meet fabric, pattern and design requirements

3. Attach the components in an efficient sequence

4. Use sewing methods which are appropriate to the type of component

5. Attach the components together securely and to the required shape and finish

6. Attach lining component if required by appropriate method

7. Check and confirm that there are no loose threads on the finished table treatment

8. Check and confirm that the visual appearance of the table treatment meets the specification

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working practices when using tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different fabrics and how this can affect their behaviour during positioning and sewing

b) why the sequence in which components are attached is important to the efficiency of the process and the quality of the outcome achieved

c) when and why sorts of sewing methods are used

d) how different trimmings and decorative finishes are applied

e) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

f) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

g) your personal responsibility with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 151 November 2010

ELEMENT 250.3 Finish a table treatment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need to complete the specification

2. Check that you have the required specification and that it is complete

3. Assemble components using appropriate method

4. Attach components using appropriate sewing methods

5. Accurately position any trimmings or decorative finishes to give the required visual appearance

6. Securely attach the trimmings or decorative finishes using methods which will give the required durability and appearance

7. Make sure that there are no loose ends or visible stitchings

8. Follow an efficient sequence when applying trimmings or decorative finishes

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working procedures at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) what sorts of trimmings and decorative finishes are used in table treatments and why

b) terms used in technical specifications for table treatments

c) why the sequence in which the components are attached is of importance to the appearance of the finished table treatment

d) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

e) who to report to with unsolvable problems

f) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 152 November 2010

Unit 251: Produce simple bed treatments This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare components and produce a standard table treatment. This involves:

measuring and cutting fabric to make a bed cover or bedspread

sewing the components to make a bed cover or bedspread

trimming and finishing the bed cover or bedspread

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 251.1 Prepare components for a bed treatment 251.2 Sew a bed treatment 251.3 Finish a bed treatment There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 153 November 2010

Scope statement

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Components The pieces of material from which a table treatment is

fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. Examples of sewing method could include straight, shaped sews and seams involving simple pleating.

Fabrics The different forms of material used for making table treatments. These include a range of different fabric, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics with a minimum pattern repeat of 25cm, plain and patterned pile, flat weave fabrics.

Fixing methods This Unit covers the use of hand sewing, including slip stitch, ladder stitch and hemming stitch. Machine sewing including flat, french and flat fell seams.

Problems In relation to the cutting of fabrics, these will be to do with flaws, distortions and colour/pattern variations in the fabric, inaccurate measurements and mis-alignments. In relation to the assembly and sewing process, these will be to do with slipping, fraying, inaccuracies, poor seam quality and equipment faults. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rectifying these types of problems in ways which ensure that the quality of the outcome is not compromised.

Sewing This Unit covers both machine and hand sewing. Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be

carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material cutting and shaping accuracy is to within +/- 5mm, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting

component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm

Trimmings and Decorative Finishes This Unit covers the assembly and/or fixing of piping, braids, fringes, cords, flange cords and braids, applied and inserted into seams, hand and machine sewn. This Unit also includes the use of other decorative detailing, eg pleating, gathering, appliqué, tucks, smocking.

Tools and equipment This Unit covers the use of cutting, measuring and marking equipment and both hand sewing equipment including scissors, pins, needles, thread, tailor‟s chalk, and sewing machines.

SVQs in Furniture 154 November 2010

ELEMENT 251.1 Prepare components for a bed treatment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep the work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

3. Plan the cutting of the fabric so as to minimise waste and take account of the design characteristics and handling implications of the fabric to be used

4. Measure and mark out the components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits for the fabric being used

5. Ensure fabric placement and alignment is appropriate for the type and number of components required and the fabric characteristics

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

7. Follow safe working procedures when using sharp tools and items of equipment

8. Protect the fabric from damage while it is being worked on

9. Make sure that the components are clearly and accurately marked where necessary

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for bed treatments

b) the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials used in bed treatments

c) how many measurements and of which dimension are needed to ensure accurate cutting and fitting in respect of different types of component

d) which markers are most appropriate to use for different types of fabric

e) what cutting tolerances are appropriate for different types of component and in what ways this may be influenced by fabric type

f) what the implications are of not properly placing and aligning fabric before cutting it

g) why it is important to minimise waste

h) how to take account of design characteristics such as pattern repeats and pile direction in planning cutting

i) the sorts of problems that can occur during marking out and cutting fabric and how to deal with them

j) the functions and uses of the different types of measuring and marking tools

k) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

l) what steps should be taken to protect fabric from damage

SVQs in Furniture 155 November 2010

ELEMENT 251.2 Sew a standard bed treatment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately place all materials and components in their correct position

2. Make sure that components are correctly orientated and aligned to meet fabric, pattern and design requirements

3. Attach the components in an efficient sequence

4. Use sewing methods which are appropriate to the type of component

5. Attach the components together securely and to the required shape and finish

6. Attach lining component if required by appropriate method

7. Check and confirm that there are no loose threads on the finished bed treatment

8. Check and confirm that the visual appearance of the table treatment meets the specification

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working practices when using tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different fabrics and how this can affect their behaviour during positioning and sewing

b) why the sequence in which components are attached is important to the efficiency of the process and the quality of the outcome achieved

c) when and why different types of linings may be used in bed treatments

d) when and why sorts of sewing methods are used

e) how different trimmings and decorative finishes are applied

f) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

g) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

h) your personal responsibility with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 156 November 2010

ELEMENT 251.3 Finish a bed treatment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need to complete the specification

2. Check that you have the required specification and that it is complete

3. Assemble components using appropriate method

4. Attach components using appropriate sewing methods

5. Accurately position any trimmings or decorative finishes to give the required visual appearance

6. Securely attach the trimmings or decorative finishes using methods which will give the required durability and appearance

7. Make sure that there are no loose ends or visible stitchings

8. Follow an efficient sequence when applying trimmings or decorative finishes

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working procedures at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) what sorts of trimmings and decorative finishes are used in bed treatments and why

b) terms used in technical specifications for bed treatments

c) why the sequence in which the components are attached is of importance to the appearance of the finished bed treatment

d) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

e) who to report to with unsolvable problems

f) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 157 November 2010

Unit 252: Produce scatter and bolster cushions and padded items This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare components and produce a standard scatter and bolster cushion and padded item. This involves:

measuring and cutting fabric to make a scatter and bolster cushion and padded item

sewing the components to make a scatter and bolster cushion and padded item

trimming and finishing the scatter and bolster cushion and padded item

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 252.1 Prepare components to produce scatter and bolster cushions and padded items 252.2 Sew a standard scatter and bolster cushion and padded item 252.3 Finish a scatter and bolster cushion and padded item There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 158 November 2010

Scope statement

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Components The pieces of material from which a scatter and bolster

cushion and padded item are fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. Examples of sewing methods could include straight, shaped sews and seams involving simple pleating.

Fabrics The different forms of material used for making scatter and bolster cushion and padded items. These include a range of different fabric, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics with a minimum pattern repeat of 25cm, plain and patterned pile, flat weave fabrics.

Fixing methods This Unit covers the use of hand sewing, including slip stitch, ladder stitch and hemming stitch. Machine sewing including flat, french and flat fell seams.

Problems In relation to the cutting of fabrics, these will be to do with flaws, distortions and colour/pattern variations in the fabric, inaccurate measurements and mis-alignments. In relation to the assembly and sewing process, these will be to do with slipping, fraying, inaccuracies, poor seam quality and equipment faults. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rectifying these types of problems in ways which ensure that the quality of the outcome is not compromised.

Sewing This Unit covers both machine and hand sewing. Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be

carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material cutting and shaping accuracy is to within +/- 5mm, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting

component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm

Trimmings and Decorative Finishes This Unit covers the assembly and/or fixing of piping, braids, fringes, cords, flange cords and braids, applied and inserted into seams, hand and machine sewn. This Unit also includes the use of other decorative detailing: pleating, gathering, appliqué, tucks, smocking.

Closures Tools and equipment

This Unit covers the assembly and/or fixing of various closures, eg zips, buttons, tabs, ties, hooks & eye closures. This Unit covers the use of cutting, measuring and marking equipment and both hand sewing equipment including scissors, pins, needles, thread, tailor‟s chalk and sewing machines.

SVQs in Furniture 159 November 2010

ELEMENT 252.1 Prepare components for producing scatter and bolster cushions and padded items

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep the work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

3. Plan the cutting of the fabric so as to minimise waste and take account of the design characteristics and handling implications of the fabric to be used

4. Measure and mark out the components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits for the fabric being used

5. Ensure fabric placement and alignment is appropriate for the type and number of components required and the fabric characteristics

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

7. Follow safe working procedures when using sharp tools and items of equipment

8. Protect the fabric from damage while it is being worked on

9. Make sure that the components are clearly and accurately marked where necessary

To do this you need to know:

a. the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for cushion treatments

b. the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials used in cushion treatments

c. how many measurements and of which dimension are needed to ensure accurate cutting and fitting in respect of different types of component

d. which markers are most appropriate to use for different types of fabric

e. what cutting tolerances are appropriate for different types of component and in what ways this may be influenced by fabric type

f. what the implications are of not properly placing and aligning fabric before cutting it

g. why it is important to minimise waste

h. how to take account of design characteristics such as pattern repeats and pile direction in planning cutting

i. the sorts of problems that can occur during marking out and cutting fabric and how to deal with them

j. the functions and uses of the different types of measuring and marking tools

k. what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

l. what steps should be taken to protect fabric from damage

SVQs in Furniture 160 November 2010

ELEMENT 252.2 Sew a scatter and bolster cushion and padded item

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately place all materials and components in their correct position

2. Make sure that components are correctly orientated and aligned to meet fabric, pattern and design requirements

3. Attach the components in an efficient sequence.

4. Use sewing methods which are appropriate to the type of component

5. Attach the components together securely and to the required shape and finish

6. Fit closure components if required and by appropriate method

7. Check and confirm that there are no loose threads on the finished cushions or padded item.

8. Check and confirm that the visual appearance of the cushion and/or padded item meets the specification

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working practices when using tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different fabrics and how this can affect their behaviour during positioning and sewing

b) why the sequence in which components are attached is important to the efficiency of the process and the quality of the outcome achieved

c) how different trimmings and decorative finishes are applied

d) when and why sorts of sewing methods are used

e) when and why various methods of closures are used

f) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

g) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

h) your personal responsibility with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 161 November 2010

ELEMENT 252.3 Finish a scatter and bolster cushion and padded item

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need to complete the specification

2. Check that you have the required specification and that it is complete

3. Assemble components using the appropriate method

4. Attach components using appropriate sewing methods

5. Accurately position any closures, trimmings or decorative finishes to give the required visual appearance

6. Securely attach the closures, trimmings or decorative finishes using methods which will give the required durability and appearance

7. Make sure that there are no loose ends or visible stitching

8. Follow an efficient sequence when applying closures, trimmings or decorative finishes

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working procedures at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) what sorts of trimmings and decorative finishes are used in cushions and padded items and why

b) when and why different closures are used for producing scatter and bolster cushion and padded items

c) terms used in technical specifications for producing scatter and bolster cushion and padded items

d) why the sequence in which the components are attached is of importance to the appearance of the finished scatter and bolster cushion and padded item

e) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

f) who to report to with unsolvable problems

g) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 162 November 2010

Unit 253: Prepare fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings

This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare fabric and components used in soft furnishings. This involves:

preparing fabrics, templates and lays

laying out fabrics

matching fabrics

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety

There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it.

253.1 Prepare fabrics, templates and lays 253.2 Layout and match fabric There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 163 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Materials The different forms of material used for soft furnishings. These

include a range of different fabrics, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics, plain pile, vinyl, stretch fabrics and flat weave fabrics. In addition, materials include finishing materials used in edgings, trimmings and linings and for the covering of buttons.

Components The pieces of material from which a soft furnishing item (eg curtain length, lining, blind, bed hanging) is fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. They may be simple or complex, symmetrical or asymmetrical.

Templates and lays The moulds or shapes used to enable the marking out and cutting of material to specified size and shape. They may be made of paper, card or plastic.

Cutting tools and equipment Manual cutting equipment including:

knives

shears

scalpels Powered cutting equipment including:

powered knives

circular cutters

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material shall be shaped and cut accurately, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting

component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm

Problems In relation to the preparation and laying out of templates, fabrics and lays, these will be to do with material defects, colour/pattern mismatching, defects and faults. In relation to the cutting process, these will be to do blunt or non-functional tools and equipment. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rejecting, replacing or rectifying these sorts of problems, reporting them when they cannot be dealt with quickly, safely and readily.

SVQs in Furniture 164 November 2010

ELEMENT 253.1 Prepare fabrics, templates and lays

In carrying out this work you must:

10. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

11. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

12. Obtain the fabric, templates and lays and check that they conform to the specification

13. Deal promptly with any problems that arise, reporting any which you cannot solve

14. Follow safe working practices at all times

15. Keep work area tidy and protect items from damage while they are being worked on

16. Follow safe working procedures when lifting and moving heavy items

17. Complete the preparations within the required time

18. Complete required records so that they are accurate and legible

To do this you need to know:

i) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for soft furnishings

j) the functions of the different types of tools and equipment that are used in soft furnishings

k) how to handle sharp and powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

l) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety legislation

m) how to set out a work area for efficient working and the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

n) where to obtain the fabric, templates and lays from and how to check that they conform to specification

o) what the consequences are of lubricants and debris being left on work surfaces, tools and equipment

p) what information should be recorded and why this is important

SVQs in Furniture 165 November 2010

ELEMENT 253.2 Layout and match material

In carrying out this work you must:

11. Check that the pattern and batch number of the material corresponds with the specification

12. When necessary colour match part rolls and integrate them into the complete job

13. Mark any material faults which are within specification limits

14. Check, when necessary that the pattern of the material is matched

15. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

16. Follow safe working procedures at all times

17. Keep your work area tidy and protect the fabric from damage while it is being worked on

18. Store unused part rolls of material in a designated location and position

19. Complete preparations within required time

To do this you need to know:

o) the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials used in soft furnishings

p) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for soft furnishings

q) why it is important to check fabrics, templates and lays against specifications and what to do where there are faults or problems with them

r) the handling and rolling out characteristics of different types of fabrics used in soft furnishings

s) how to match the pattern if necessary

t) how and why to manage the use of part rolls of fabrics

u) types of fabric, template and lay faults which occur, how they are identified and how they can be dealt with

v) the importance of storing fabrics in suitable locations and positions

w) waste limits and why waste should be kept to a minimum

x) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety legislation

y) who to report an unsolvable problem to

z) equipment storage arrangements and why it is important to follow them

aa) why it is important to keep to time schedules

bb) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 166 November 2010

Unit 256: Cut fabrics and components for use in soft furnishings This Unit addresses the competence required to cut fabrics used in soft furnishings. This involves:

cutting fabric components

marking and sorting components

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 256.1 Cut fabrics 256.2 Mark and prepare fabric components

There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 167 November 2010

Scope statement

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Materials The different forms of material used for soft furnishings.

These include a range of different fabrics, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics, plain pile, vinyl, stretch fabrics and flat weave fabrics, as well as natural hide. In addition, „materials‟ includes finishing materials used in edgings, trimmings and linings and for the covering of buttons.

Components The pieces of material from which a soft furnishing item (eg curtain length, lining, blind, bed hanging) is fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. They may be simple or complex, symmetrical or asymmetrical.

Templates and lays The moulds or shapes used to enable the marking out and cutting of material to specified size and shape. They may be made of paper, card, hardboard, plywood or plastic.

Cutting tools and equipment Manual cutting equipment including:

knives

shears

scalpels Powered cutting equipment including:

powered knives

circular cutters

panel cutters

slitting machines

cutting benches

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met: material shall be shaped and cut accurately, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm.

Problems In relation to the preparation and laying out of templates, fabrics and lays, these will be to do with material defects, colour/pattern mismatching, defects and faults in templates and lays. In relation to the cutting process, these will be to do with blunt or non-functional tools and equipment. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rejecting, replacing or rectifying these sorts of problems, reporting them when they cannot be dealt with quickly, safely and readily.

SVQs in Furniture 168 November 2010

ELEMENT 256.1 Cut fabric components

In carrying out this work you must:

11. Plan the marking out and cutting of the material so as to minimise waste and take account of material type, width and pile

12. Take account of material pattern, type, width and pile when marking out and cutting

13. Correctly align marked components on the material, taking account of pattern matching when appropriate

14. Make sure that marked components will be free of major flaws and that any minor defects will not be visible when used

15. Mark out components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits

16. Cut the components cleanly and accurately to within the given size and shape tolerances

17. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

18. Follow safe working procedures when:

using sharp tools and items of equipment;

using powered equipment;

19. Keep your work area tidy and protect the material from damage while it is being worked on

20. Store cutting tools and equipment in a designated safe location and position

To do this you need to know:

l) the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials used soft furnishings

m) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for soft furnishings

n) why it is necessary to maintain cut components within the given tolerances

o) what wastage levels apply and why it is important to minimise waste

p) the sorts of problems that can occur during marking out and cutting materials and how to deal with them

q) when and why it is important to match the pattern

r) the functions and uses of the different types of tools and equipment that are used in cutting material

s) how to handle sharp and powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

t) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety legislation

u) the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

v) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

SVQs in Furniture 169 November 2010

ELEMENT 256.2 Mark and prepare fabric components

In carrying out this work you must:

9. Sort out, mark the cut components using the designated identification system

10. Remove templates and lays and check that they are free from damage before storing them over for future use

11. Prepare the components according to the specification and confirm that they are ready for the next stage in the process

12. Protect the components from damage while they are being handled and passed on to the next stage

13. Sort out and move any left over material and wastes into the designated locations according to what is to happen to them

14. Deal promptly and effectively with any damaged templates, lays and other problems

15. Pass the components over to the next stage in the process in the required time

16. Complete required records so that they are accurate and legible

To do this you need to know:

j) which markers it is most appropriate to use for different types of material

k) how and why components are marked and what sorts of systems are used

l) how to determine when templates and lays are beyond use and how to make repairs to those that can be repaired

m) how to interpret work specifications so as to identify the preparations needed

n) why it is important to protect components from damage

o) how to handle and store left over materials so as to make the best use of them

p) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

q) waste handling arrangements in the workplace

r) what information should be recorded and why this is important

SVQs in Furniture 170 November 2010

Unit 258: Produce loose covers This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare components and produce a loose cover. This involves:

measuring and cutting fabric to make a loose cover

sewing the components to make a loose cover

trimming and finishing the loose cover

have an understanding of the Furniture & Furnishings (Fire)(Safety) Regulations 1988

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are four elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 258.1 Prepare components for a loose cover 258.2 Sew a loose cover 258.3 Finish a loose cover 258.4 Understand the Fire Regulations There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 171 November 2010

Scope statement

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Item to be covered The item to be covered will typically be an upholstered

armless chair. Components The pieces of material from which a loose cover is

fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. Examples of sewing method could include straight, shaped sews and seams involving simple pleating.

Fabrics Fixing methods

The different forms of material used for loose covers. These include a range of different fabric, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics with a minimum pattern repeat of 25cm, plain and patterned pile, flat weave fabrics. This Unit covers the use of hand sewing, including slip stitch, ladder stitch and hemming stitch. Machine sewing including flat, french and flat fell seams.

Problems In relation to the cutting of fabrics, these will be to do with flaws, distortions and colour/pattern variations in the fabric, inaccurate measurements and mis-alignments. In relation to the assembly and sewing process, these will be to do with slipping, fraying, inaccuracies, poor seam quality and equipment faults. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rectifying these types of problems in ways which ensure that the quality of the outcome is not compromised.

Sewing This Unit covers both machine and hand sewing. Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be

carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material cutting and shaping accuracy is to within +/- 5mm, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting

component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm

Trimmings and Decorative Finishes This Unit covers the assembly and/or fixing of piping, braids, fringes, cords, flange cords and braids, applied and inserted into seams, hand and machine sewn. This Unit also includes the use of other decorative detailing, eg pleating, gathering, appliqué, tucks, smocking and skirts.

Tools and equipment This Unit covers the use of cutting, measuring and marking equipment and both hand sewing equipment including scissors, pins, needles, thread, tailor‟s chalk and sewing machines.

Fire Regulations This Unit requires an understanding of the UK‟s Fire Regulations with regard to domestic upholstered furniture, including the use of loose and stretch covers and the fabrics they are made of. .

SVQs in Furniture 172 November 2010

ELEMENT 258.1 Prepare components for a loose cover

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep the work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

3. Plan the cutting of the fabric so as to minimise waste and take account of the design characteristics and handling implications of the fabric to be used

4. Measure and mark out the components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits for the fabric being used

5. Ensure fabric placement and alignment is appropriate for the type and number of components required and the fabric characteristics

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

7. Follow safe working procedures when using sharp tools and items of equipment

8. Protect the fabric from damage while it is being worked on

9. Make sure that the components are clearly and accurately marked where necessary

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for loose covers

b) the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials used in loose covers

c) how many measurements and of which dimension are needed to ensure accurate cutting and fitting in respect of different types of component

d) which markers are most appropriate to use for different types of fabric

e) what cutting tolerances are appropriate for different types of component and in what ways this may be influenced by fabric type

f) what the implications are of not properly placing and aligning fabric before cutting it

g) why it is important to minimise waste

h) how to take account of design characteristics such as pattern repeats and pile direction in planning cutting

i) the sorts of problems that can occur during marking out and cutting fabric and how to deal with them

j) the functions and uses of the different types of measuring and marking tools

k) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

l) what steps should be taken to protect fabric from damage

m) the requirements of the Fire Regulations relating to loose and stretch covers on domestic upholstered furniture

n) fabric compositions in relation to the fire regulations

SVQs in Furniture 173 November 2010

ELEMENT 258.2 Sew a standard loose cover

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately place all materials and components in their correct position

2. Make sure that components are correctly orientated and aligned to meet fabric, pattern and design requirements

3. Attach the components in an efficient sequence

4. Use sewing methods which are appropriate to the type of component

5. Attach the components together securely and to the required shape and finish

6. Attach lining component if required by appropriate method

7. Check and confirm that there are no loose threads on the finished loose cover

8. Check and confirm that the visual appearance of the loose cover meets the specification

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working practices when using tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different fabrics and how this can affect their behaviour during positioning and sewing

b) why the sequence in which components are attached is important to the efficiency of the process and the quality of the outcome achieved

c) when and why different types of linings may be used in loose covers

d) when and why sorts of sewing methods are used

e) how different trimmings and decorative finishes are applied

f) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

g) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

h) your personal responsibility with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 174 November 2010

ELEMENT 258.3 Finish a loose cover

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need to complete the specification

2. Check that you have the required specification and that it is complete

3. Assemble components using the appropriate method

4. Attach components using appropriate sewing methods

5. Accurately position any trimmings or decorative finishes to give the required visual appearance

6. Securely attach the trimmings or decorative finishes using methods which will give the required durability and appearance

7. Make sure that there are no loose ends or visible stitching

8. Follow an efficient sequence when applying trimmings or decorative finishes

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working procedures at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) what sorts of trimmings and decorative finishes are used in loose covers and why

b) terms used in technical specifications for loose covers

c) why the sequence in which the components are attached is of importance to the appearance of the finished loose cover

d) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

e) who to report to with unsolvable problems

f) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 175 November 2010

ELEMENT 258.4 Understand the Fire Regulations

In carrying out this work you must:

1. carry out the work required in order that the finished loose cover complies with the Furniture & Furnishings (Fire) (Safety) Regulations 1988

2. understand the fabric composition of various fabrics

3. Check and confirm that the fabric choice of the loose cover meets the specification and requirements of the regulations

4. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

5. Follow safe working practices when using tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the implications and legal requirements of the Furniture & Furnishings (Fire) (Safety) Regulations 1988

b) the meaning of technical terms used in relation to the fire regulations

c) the composition and characteristics of different fabrics and how this applies to the fire regulations

d) the difference between a fire retardant calico and a fire retardant interline/barrier cloth

e) when and what types of fabrics can be used with a fire retardant interline/barrier cloth

f) the cleaning, care and labelling requirements of various fabrics used to make loose covers

g) the implications of various trimmings in relation to the fire regulations

h) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

i) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

j) your personal responsibility with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 176 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 301: Evaluate and develop own skills and expertise This Unit addresses the competence required to evaluate and develop your own skills and expertise in an aspect of furniture, furnishings and interiors. This involves:

evaluating your current skills and expertise against industry standards

obtaining and making use of information on industry standards

finding out about development opportunities

actively seeking to develop yourself professionally This Unit contains two elements: 301.1 Evaluate own skills and expertise 301.2 Develop own skills and expertise There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 177 November 2010

Scope statements

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Evaluation/evaluate Evaluation is the systematic assessment of skills and

expertise in order to compare them against preferred, professional standard and identify areas for improvement.

Current professional standards Every profession and occupation develops expectations about good professional practice. These may or may not be set down. In the furniture, furnishings and interiors sector the national occupational standards provide clear and current specifications of high quality practice and different professional bodies may also have expectations built up and discussed through peer group meetings. In addition, the Health and Safety Executive publishes guidelines on standards of practice in relation to specific health and safety issues.

Development goals Development goals may be in terms of maintaining a current standard (eg by finding opportunities to practice a skill) or improving skills and expertise to raise current performance.

Development methods Development methods could include, among other things, self-guided practice and study, attendance at courses and other forms of structured learning opportunity, making use of reference materials and/or seeking advice and support from a mentor.

SVQs in Furniture 178 November 2010

ELEMENT 301.1 Evaluate own skills and expertise

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Identify suitable sources of information on current professional standards

2. Objectively assess your own skills and expertise against current standards

3. Seek constructive feedback from relevant others on how well your own skills and expertise match current standards

4. Identify areas for development to maintain and improve your own skills and expertise

5. Prioritise development goals against your personal and employment requirements

6. Make time to evaluate your skills and expertise at regular intervals

To do this you need to know:

a) what sources of information on standards exist and how can they be accessed

b) what sort of information you need to carry out an objective assessment

c) how to ask for and make use of constructive feedback

d) why it is important to prioritise

e) how regular self-evaluation can help you to maintain and develop your skills and expertise

SVQs in Furniture 179 November 2010

ELEMENT 301.2 Develop own skills and expertise

In carrying out this work you must: 1. Realistically assess the time and other resources required to meet your development goals 2. Identify and use development methods that are

suited to your goals and learning preferences

achievable within the resources available to you 3. Review your progress and the effectiveness of the development methods you have chosen 4. Adjust the development methods used as required to make sure you meet your goals 5. Seek and make good use of support to help you meet your goals

To do this you need to know:

a) how to judge the time and other resources that will be needed

b) why it is important to take your own learning preferences into account when choosing a development method that will work for you

c) why it is important to review your progress and to make sure that the development method chosen is working

d) what support is available through learning providers, employers, peers, professional bodies and others to help you develop

SVQs in Furniture 180 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 302: Evaluate and specify requirements for making hand-crafted furniture and/or soft furnishings This Unit addresses the competence required to evaluate and specify the work to be done to prepare and finish hand-crafted furniture and/or soft furnishings. This involves:

assessing the implications of a specification

specifying methods, techniques, tools and materials to be used

proposing material purchases

taking account of health and safety implications There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 302.1 Evaluate what is involved in fulfilling a piece of work 302.2 Produce a work specification 302.3 Propose material purchase to meet a specification There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 181 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Issues The kinds of issues that might arise in relation to meeting

work requirements could include lack of sufficient time, the need to transfer staff with the required skills between jobs and the knock-on effects of this, difficulties in obtaining the materials or carrying out the processes required to meet the original requirement which mean that design changes might be implicated.

Materials Materials include hard and soft woods and wood composites. Woods may be new or reclaimed, burr or pippy, oily or resinous and ripple or interlocking grain. All types of fabric, threads, linings and filling materials. Other materials are traditional and modern stains, grainfillers, primers and sealers. Stains, fillers, sealers and primers may be based on oil, water, chemical, spirit or mixed solvents. Some may require the addition of catalysts.

Methods and techniques Refer to standard and specialised techniques within the different processes, eg stringing veneers, parquetry, stencilling, applying shellac and window treatments etc.

Personal Protective Equipment This covers eye protection, gloves, overalls and respiratory equipment as well as barrier, cleansing and after-care creams.

Processes Wood working processes would include cutting, joint making, veneer and inlay making and application, assembly, attachment of doors, drawers, fittings, mouldings, carvings and glassware. Finishing processes would include hand polishing and finishing, spray-finishing and the application of decorative effects and finishes. Sewing processes to include hand and/or machine.

Tools and equipment The hand tools and equipment used within hand-crafted furniture making include woodworking equipment such as saws (tenon, dovetail, band), measuring equipment (squares, cutting and metering gauges, ruler), planes (jack, block, smoothing, scraper, rebate, shoulder, bull-nosed), chisels (bevel-edged, mortice, firmer, paring), cramps (sash, G, edging/lipping), knives, cabinet scraper, honing stones, screwdrivers, panel hammers, mallets and straight edges. In addition powered tools including band and circular saws, morticers, routers, drills, grind stones, belt sanders, planers and biscuit joiners may be needed. Other equipment used additionally in finishing processes would include brushes, pads, steel wool, irons, steam generators, mixing and measuring equipment, rags, cloths and sponges. The hand tools and equipment used in soft furnishings include scissors, pins, needles, bodkin, pinking shears, embroidery scissors, seam ripper, tape measure, tailor‟s

SVQs in Furniture 182 November 2010

chalk, set square and thread. Powered equipment such as sewing machine.

Work required A piece of work which has been commissioned and which requires one or a number of hand-crafted furniture and/or soft furnishing making processes to be used.

SVQs in Furniture 183 November 2010

ELEMENT 302.1 Evaluate what is involved in fulfilling a piece of work

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Obtain clear and complete details of the work required

2. Make an accurate assessment of the types, qualities and quantities of material resources that will be needed to meet the requirement

3. Make an accurate evaluation of the skill and knowledge base needed to carry out the techniques and methods involved

4. Accurately identify the types of tools and equipment that will be needed to meet the requirements

5. Accurately estimate the time that would be needed to achieve the requirements

6. Check and confirm the availability of required personnel, time, resources, tools and equipment and any constraints on their use for the piece of work in question

7. Identify technically suitable alternatives where requirements cannot be met in full

8. Bring any issues which arise from the requirements to the prompt attention of the appropriate person to deal with them

9. Agree which option is to be followed where choices are possible in the way in which the requirements are to be met

To do this you need to know:

a) the steps, techniques, timings, skills, materials, tools and equipment that are needed to conduct a range of hand-crafted furniture making and/or soft furnishing processes

b) what kinds of skills and knowledge are needed to carry out different processes within hand-crafted furniture making and/or soft furnishings

c) where appropriate the handling characteristics of different species of wood and of wood composites used in making hand-crafted furniture and how these affect their use for different items of furniture

d) where appropriate the identification and growth characteristics of different species of timber and its importance to tensile and compression strength, seasoning, durability, degradation, infestation and density

e) where appropriate the handling characteristics of different fabrics and fillings used in soft furnishings

f) typical time requirements for production of hand-crafted furniture and/or soft furnishings

g) why it is important to check the availability of different sorts of resources before committing to a piece of work

h) what sorts of constraints can arise and why these might interfere with the meeting of requirements

i) your personal responsibilities with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 184 November 2010

ELEMENT 302.2 Produce a work specification

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Clearly specify the outcome qualities which must be met

2. Be accurate in specifying measurements and tolerances

3. Use technical terms correctly

4. Specify appropriate processes, methods and techniques to achieve the required results

5. Specify appropriate tools and equipment for the work to be done

6. Clearly detail the type and quality of materials to be used

7. Detail suitable procedures to follow to comply with health and safety requirements

8. When appropriate specify appropriate personal protective equipment for the materials being handled and the tools and equipment to be used

9. Clearly detail the allowed time for each stage of the process and the overall deadlines within which it must be completed

10. Make sure that the specification is clearly and accurately recorded

11. Include examples and comparison standards as needed to provide an accurate specification of colour and finish requirements

12. Record and report the specification following organisational procedures

To do this you need to know:

a) conventions used in preparing work specifications and specifying measurements and tolerances for hand-crafted furniture and/or soft furnishings

b) the terminology used within hand-crafted furniture and/or soft furnishings

c) the uses of different methods, techniques and processes involved in making hand-crafted furniture and/or soft furnishings

d) different materials used within hand-crafted furniture and/or soft furnishings and what they are used for and why

e) the uses and descriptions of fixings, fittings and other attachments used in hand-crafted furniture and /or soft furnishings

f) your responsibilities with regard to health and safety

g) why it is of value to include examples such as colour boards, colour samples and other comparison standards when describing finishes and outcomes to be achieved

h) what personal protective equipment should be worn when handling different sorts of materials and using different types of tools and equipment, and why

SVQs in Furniture 185 November 2010

ELEMENT 302.3 Propose material purchases to meet a specification

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately identify the materials that will be required to meet forthcoming work requirements

2. Check and confirm whether stock levels of required materials are sufficient to meet demand

3. Accurately and clearly specify the types and quantities of materials that need to be purchased to meet requirements

4. Agree on alternatives that fulfil the design specification where preferred materials cannot be supplied

5. Accurately identify where forthcoming work requirements mean that bulk purchases, and savings, can be made

6. Check and confirm that purchases are within budget before placing an order

7. Clearly specify delivery timescales that will mean that materials are in hand when needed

8. Make sure that the specifications are clear, complete and unambiguous before passing them on for processing

9. Submit material purchase specifications for processing through the correct organisational procedures

To do this you need to know:

a) stock control systems in use for different types of materials

b) the handling characteristics of different components/materials used in making hand-crafted furniture and/or soft furnishings and how these affect their use

c) which materials/components could be used instead of the preferred ones

d) typical time requirements for production of hand-crafted furniture and/or soft furnishings

e) and understand the budgetary limits that apply to the specification

f) who is authorised to make changes to budgetary limits

g) supplier sales, ordering and delivery arrangements

h) what the procedures are for submitting purchase specifications for processing

i) why it is important to adhere to accurate purchase specifications

SVQs in Furniture 186 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 303: Evaluate and specify restoration requirements This Unit addresses the competence required to evaluate the condition of an item of furniture and specify what is required to restore it. This involves:

assessing the condition of an item of furniture

producing a condition report

producing a work specification for the restoration There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 303.1 Assess the condition of an item of furniture 303.2 Specify restoration requirements There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 187 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Customer Customers for a restoration may be private or corporate

(eg via a gallery).

Degradation The level of deterioration in the structure and fabric of an item of furniture. Degradation can be mechanical (eg joint loosening), physical (eg fracture, ripping), biological (eg infestation) and/or chemical (eg pollutants).

Restoration The return of an item of older, traditional or antique furniture to its original condition. Restoration commissions may be small scale (eg a small stool or chest) or large scale (eg because of the number of items to be restored, or because of the condition of the item, or because of the rarity/value of the item).

Sources of information Information sources would include documents (eg historical records, manufacturer‟s specifications), other people, professional/trade organisations. Information sources may be accessed directly or electronically. Information may have been collected and collated by another person as part of research into the restoration. In the context of this Unit, the important dimension is that the information is used to support valid and effective decision-making.

Specification The specification for a restoration will include details on the following:

quality criteria to be met

budgetary limits

time scale for the work

materials to be used

techniques to be used

SVQs in Furniture 188 November 2010

ELEMENT 303.1 Assess the condition of an item of furniture

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Develop an accurate and thorough assessment of the condition of the item in terms of its

construction

fragility

material composition

finish and appearance

2. Handle and examine the item without causing further damage or degradation

3. Accurately identify any vulnerabilities in the item which will need to be addressed

4. Use valid and reliable sources of information and expert advice as required to ensure your evaluation is complete

5. Accurately determine the probable causes of damage and degradation in the item

6. Record your assessment in sufficient detail to allow restoration options to be explored and agreed

7. Produce your condition report for the customer within an economic timescale

8. Maintain effective communication with the customer

To do this you need to know:

a) what factors are contained in a condition report for furniture restoration

b) how to identify the construction methods and materials used in items of furniture from different historical periods and countries of origin

c) what steps to take to avoid causing damage and degradation to an item of furniture

d) what to look for when assessing how vulnerable the item is to continuing degradation

e) why it is helpful to identify the causes of damage and degradation so these can be taken into account when considering restoration requirements

f) how to identify the signs of common forms of deterioration in items of furniture

g) why you should keep a record of your assessment

h) how to provide clear information to a customer, what type of information they need, and why it could be important to them

SVQs in Furniture 189 November 2010

ELEMENT 303.2 Specify restoration requirements

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Explore a viable range of restoration options

2. Make effective use of available sources of information and research findings

3. Take account of the intended placement and use of the item when evaluating restoration options

4. Conduct a fair and thorough assessment of the outcome quality, costs and timescale implications of alternative restoration options

5. Recommend an appropriate course of action to optimise quality, costs and timescale in line with customer expectations

6. Take clear account of customer preferences and ensure that they are recorded with the specification

7. Specify the requirements of the restoration work to be done in detail, to ensure it will be accurately interpreted

8. Pass on the specification for the restoration to the correct people to take it forward and check that their understanding of it is accurate and complete

To do this you need to know:

a) why it is good practice to consider a range of options, and how to be sure that each is viable

b) what the meaning and use is of technical terms used in furniture restoration

c) why you should consider the intended placement and use of the item

d) why it is important to be fair and thorough in evaluating and balancing quality, cost and availability

e) what format, information and levels of detail are usually included in specifications for restoration work

f) why it is important to ensure that the specifications is clear and complete and has been understood

g) who to pass the specification on to for action

SVQs in Furniture 190 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 304: Select, prepare and apply decorative veneers This Unit addresses the competence required to create and fit decorative veneers on furniture. This involves:

selecting and cutting decorative veneers

preparing the groundwork for decorative veneer application

fitting decorative veneers

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 304.1 Select and prepare decorative veneers 304.2 Prepare the groundwork for veneer application 304.3 Lay decorative veneers There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 191 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Adhesives Commercially available glues used in making hand-crafted

furniture. These include polyvinyl acetate, urea or phenol formaldehyde, animal based glues, resorcinol, epoxy resins and cyanide acrylic based glues.

Conditions The conditions under which veneers require to be kept includes flattening and damping them to ensure that they remain in a suitable state for working.

Cuts This Unit covers flame or crotch, burr, crown, oyster and fiddle back veneer cuts.

Joints The joints used in making hand-crafted veneers would include the making of quartered panels, edged sheets and stringed sheets. These are influenced by the design required, which will be stated in the specifications. Joints must be accurately matched for grain orientation, colour and hue, decoration and light refraction qualities.

Jointing faults Jointing faults can arise from misalignment of panels, marks and damage to the veneers. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and making minor repairs where these can be achieved without affecting the quality of the work. Problems which cannot be resolved in that way would be reported to a senior crafts person using the correct workplace procedures.

Faults Faults can arise as a result of misalignment, discolouration, marking or blistering of the veneer or glue penetration. The person carrying out this role is responsible for preventing and resolving faults which have occurred.

Fitting method The inlay fitting methods covered by this Unit are dry fitting, pressing and the use of adhesives.

Surface The surfaces to which veneers are applied in the context of this Unit cover top, edge, back and underneath positions, as well as curved and flat surfaces.

Tools and equipment The tools and equipment used within hand-crafted furniture production environments for cutting and laying veneers covers veneering saws and knives, planes, measuring devices, veneering tape, veneering hammers, heated and unheated presses, heated cauls, adhesive rollers, edge clamps, veneer pins, adhesive pots, brushes and gluesticks, flat irons and sand bags.

Veneers Veneers used in making hand-crafted furniture are made of natural timber. Typical timbers would include, walnut, oak, mahogany, cherry and maple. Other materials may also be used, such as mother-of-pearl, brass and silver nickel.

Veneering methods The veneering methods covered by this Unit are hand-laid and mechanical pressing.

SVQs in Furniture 192 November 2010

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the qualities of the veneer, the dimensions of the veneered area and the nature of the joints to be produced. The specification will also detail the surfaces to be veneered be produced, the decorative patterns to be produced. Specifications may be written, drawn or passed on orally.

Quality The quality of a veneer can be described in terms of the grain fineness and orientation, its colour, hue and decoration, moisture content and light refraction characteristics. Veneers to be jointed require to be matched for straight, slip laid, leaf laid, book match and edge veneering, taking account of these qualities and of burrs and cross-banding.

SVQs in Furniture 193 November 2010

ELEMENT 304.1 Select and prepare decorative veneers

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Select veneers which meet the quality requirements in the work specification

2. Check that the veneers selected have no intermittent or full faults and set aside any which do

3. Match selected veneers for decoration, grain orientation, light refraction, burrs and cross-banding

4. Accurately measure and mark out the cuts to be made to within the specified tolerances

5. Minimise waste in your choice of veneers and in how you measure and mark them out for cutting

6. Handle the veneers in ways that avoid damaging them

7. Cut the veneers accurately to size and shape, keeping within the required tolerances

8. Accurately measure and align the veneers to form the required size when jointed

9. Make the joints of the required type

10. Deal promptly and effectively with any joint faults that arise

11. Use safe and effective techniques to make the cuts

12. Make sure that veneer surfaces to be glued are free of irregularities and are sanded and cleaned to the required surface finish

13. Store the veneers in appropriate conditions to keep them in the required state for working

To do this you need to know:

a) know the differences between marquetry and parquetry

b) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for veneers including burr, oyster and fiddle-back

c) what kinds of natural faults and handling damage can occur with veneers

d) how to identify faults which mean that the veneer cannot be used

e) why it is important to keep waste to a minimum

f) what characteristics are used to describe the quality of a veneer and how to identify them

g) how to balance and match veneers for burr and cross-banding

h) the growth and handling characteristics of different species of wood used as veneers, the importance of this to tensile strength, compression strength, seasoning, durability, degradation, infestation and density

i) how the characteristics of different wood veneers affects the way they are cut and stored

j) when and why quartered panel and stringed sheet jointing methods are used

k) what to look for when matching different types of veneers

l) the handling characteristics of veneers and how these can affect the jointing process

m) what kind of faults can occur with jointing veneers and what can be done to overcome them

n) quality checks that should be carried out on jointed veneers

o) the handling characteristics of veneers of different types and qualities and how to protect them from damage

p) why veneers may need to be flattened and damped during storage and the implications of not doing this

q) what the consequences are of inaccurate measuring and cutting

r) how to use cutting tools and equipment safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

s) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find

SVQs in Furniture 194 November 2010

out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

t) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 195 November 2010

ELEMENT 304.2 Prepare the groundwork for veneer application

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Make sure that the groundwork is secure, clean, free of debris and damage that could affect the veneering process and at the required temperature for the adhesive type to be used

2. Select the most appropriate adhesive for the veneer to be applied, the pattern to be produced and the surface to be veneered

3. Apply the adhesive to a coverage and depth that is appropriate to the veneer to be applied, the type and surface area of pattern to be produced and the surface to be veneered

4. Use an application style for the adhesive that is appropriate to the veneer to be applied, the type and surface area of pattern to be produced and the surface to be veneered

5. Handle tools and adhesives safely

6. Deal safely and promptly with adhesive spillages and splashes

7. Use the correct personal protective equipment for the adhesives and equipment being used

8. Deal promptly and effectively with any faults that arise

9. Store the veneers in appropriate conditions to keep them in the required state for working

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for parquetry and marquetry

b) what kinds of handling damage can occur with veneers and how to avoid it

c) what kinds of faults can occur with parquetry and marquetry and how to deal with them

d) how atmospheric conditions can affect the parquetry and marquetry process

e) why veneers may need to be flattened and damped during storage and the implications of not doing this

f) when and why different parquetry and marquetry methods are used

g) the open times, shelf life and setting times of adhesives and the implications of these for the way you work

h) the different types of adhesives, their absorption capabilities through inlays and veneers and their compatibility with veneers of different types

i) problems associated with adhesives and how to overcome them

j) where, when and how to use different types of adhesives

k) why preparation is so important to the quality of the work

l) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

SVQs in Furniture 196 November 2010

ELEMENT 304.3 Lay decorative veneers

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check and confirm that the inlay design and type matches the specification

2. Determine the best sequence to follow to achieve the required design

3. Make sure that the inlay fits the groundwork laterally and vertically

4. Make sure that the required design is accurately reproduced

5. Clean the surface so that it is free of any excess adhesives

6. Key the surface using appropriate tools and techniques, so that the finish meets the specification

7. Deal promptly and effectively with any faults that arise

8. Follow the specified fitting method, using safe and effective technique

9. Handle the inlays in ways which avoid damaging them

10. Handle adhesives safely and apply them effectively to groundwork

11. Deal safely and promptly with adhesive spillages and splashes

12. Use the correct personal protective equipment for the adhesives and equipment being used

13. Store the inlays in appropriate conditions to keep them in the required state for application

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for parquetry and marquetry inlays

b) the purpose of different tools and equipment used in fitting parquetry and marquetry inlays

c) the differences between parquetry and marquetry inlays and the depth of inlay required for each

d) what kinds of handling damage can occur with inlays and how to avoid it

e) what kinds of faults can occur with inlay fitting and how to deal with them

f) how atmospheric conditions can affect the fitting process

g) how inlays should be stored and why

h) when and why different fitting methods are used

i) the open times, shelf life and setting times of adhesives and the implications of these for the way you work

j) the different types of adhesives, their absorption capabilities through inlays and veneers and their compatibility with inlays of different types

k) problems associated with adhesives and how to overcome them

l) the uses and benefits of different ways of pressing

m) what the consequences are of inaccurate positioning

n) where, when and how to use different types of adhesives

o) why preparation is so important to the quality of the work

p) recognise window knifecut and fret cutting techniques for marquetry

q) identify sandshading techniques

r) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

SVQs in Furniture 197 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 305: Cut and assemble hand-crafted furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to assemble and complete hand-crafted furniture This involves:

Planning the cutting process

Cutting and joining

Working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 305.1 Assemble hand-crafted furniture 305.2 Fit simple doors and drawers to hand-crafted furniture There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 198 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Adhesives Commercially available glues used in making hand-crafted

furniture. These include polyvinyl acetate, urea or phenol formaldehyde, animal based glues, resorcinol, polyurethane and epoxy resins.

Assembly The carcase, frame, drawer and doors of an item of hand-crafted furniture.

Assembly methods These cover dry assembly, cramping, knock-up draw-boring assembly.

Assembly problems Problems will be related to the quality of the components, whether they are within tolerance and whether any are incorrect, missing or damaged in some way. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and making minor repairs or replacement. Problems which cannot be resolved in that way would be reported using the correct workplace procedures.

Components The pieces from which an assembly is constructed.

Cramps This Unit covers the use of a wide variety of clamps including sash, G and edging/lipping cramps.

Doors and drawers These may be made of natural timber or wood composites. Doors may be surface or flush fitted. This Unit covers the fitting of single doors only. The types of drawers covered by this Unit include those with false fronts, using mechanical runners.

Joints The joints used in making hand-crafted furniture. They include insertion, knock-down, dove-tail, mitred dove-tail, mortise and tenon, mitred tenon, bridle, lap, mitre, tongue and groove, loose tongue, housing, dowel, biscuit and butt joints.

Materials The softwoods, hardwoods and wood composites used in making hand-crafted furniture. Composites would include plywood, chipboard and MDF.

Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out. The specification will detail the assembly to be produced and the nature of the fittings and carvings and mouldings to be attached. Specifications will usually be provided in written form or by diagrams. A competent person should also be able to work from verbal instructions.

Techniques The techniques covered by this Unit include, drilling, boring, sawing, planing, abrading and cutting.

SVQs in Furniture 199 November 2010

Tools and Equipment The mallets, hammers, screwdrivers, pins, cramps and measuring devices used in the making of hand-crafted furniture. Also includes powered tools such as sanders, routers, drills and power saws as well as workshop tools and devices such as bench hooks, winding sticks, shooting boards, mitre blocks of different angles, scratch stock.

SVQs in Furniture 200 November 2010

ELEMENT 305.1 Assemble hand-crafted

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment and adhesives you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Make sure that you have clear and complete details of the specification to be met

3. Check and confirm that joints are of the correct fit and that they marry up across the whole assembly

4. Position components so that they are correctly aligned and within the required tolerances

5. Secure and assemble joints using the specified adhesives

6. Make adjustments to joints and alignments as necessary to make sure that the furniture is square and true

7. Select the appropriate cramps for the component and joint and position them to give the best result

8. Apply the appropriate level of pressure for the joint construction, its purpose within the furniture and material

9. Protect components from damage during assembly

10. Clean joints and surfaces of excess glue, debris and foreign objects

11. Use tools safely and effectively

12. Return tools and equipment to the correct storage locations when not in use

13. Dispose of wastes safely to the designated location

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for component production and assembly

b) the functions and uses of the different types of tools and equipment used in furniture assembly

c) what personal protective equipment to use and why

d) how to set out a work area for efficient working and the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

e) the growth and handling characteristics of different species of wood used in hand-crafted furniture, the importance of this to tensile strength, compression strength, seasoning, durability, degradation, infestation and density

f) how the characteristics of different materials affect the way they are cut and handled

g) what the consequences are of inaccurate measuring and cutting

h) what the consequences are of using poor technique in the construction of joints

i) when, where and why to use different sorts of cramps

j) how to protect furniture components from damage during assembly

k) how to use manual and powered tools and equipment safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

SVQs in Furniture 201 November 2010

ELEMENT 305.2 Fit simple doors and drawers to hand-crafted

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check and confirm that doors and drawers fit to within the specified tolerances for alignment and movement before fixing in position

2. Make good any fitting faults which need to be dealt with for the specified quality to be achieved

3. Accurately measure, mark and position the door fixings, drawer runners and kickers to produce the required fit

4. Secure doors, drawers, in place using the specified fitting method

5. Check and confirm that the fitted doors and drawers sit square and true and are correctly aligned and oriented.

6. Use tools safely and effectively

7. Return tools and equipment to the correct storage locations when not in use

8. Dispose of wastes safely to the designated location

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for doors and drawers

b) the functions and uses of the different types of tools and equipment used in fitting doors and drawers

c) when and why to use marking out tools and gauges

d) different sorts of hinges and their uses

e) different types of drawer runners and kickers and their uses

f) how to set out a work area for efficient working and the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

g) the growth and handling characteristics of different species of wood used in hand-crafted furniture, the importance of this to tensile strength, compression strength, seasoning, durability, degradation, infestation and density

h) how the characteristics of different wood composites affect the way fittings are attached

i) how to use manual and powered tools and equipment safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

j) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

SVQs in Furniture 202 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 307: Complete high specification hand-crafted furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to finish hand-crafted furniture that is of a high specification. (A significant quantity of the work in this Unit should be by hand; in particular through and lapped dove tails, the fitting of draws and shooting in of doors). This involves:

fitting drawers

fitting and attaching multiple doors

applying cabinet fittings

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 307.1 Fit drawers / Fit and attach cabinet doors 307.2 Apply fittings to complete an item of furniture There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 203 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Attachment methods and techniques

The attachment methods covered by this Unit are let-in and applied. Fittings are attached by screwing, pinning or gluing techniques or combinations of these.

Doors and drawers These may be made of natural timber or wood composites. Doors may be flat or curved and surface or flush fitted. This Unit covers the fitting of multiple doors. The types of drawers covered by this Unit are those without false fronts, are made and fitted by hand, and which do not make use of mechanical runners.

Fittings and Wood mouldings This covers wooden applied mouldings. They are applied to flat surfaces, curved surfaces and within a framework. Fittings refer to decorative and functional items which complete an item of furniture. They may include handles, finger-plates, escutcheons, chest corners, recessed door backs, mouldings and carvings, lighting, cable management devices and glasswork.

Fitting faults Faults that can arise in fitting doors and drawers include twists, misalignments, gaps and binding. Faults that can arise in the case of applying fittings include misalignments, not lying flat to a curved surface and damage to surrounding areas of furniture.

Fixings Fixings refer to hinges, screws, bolts, stays and pins.

Materials The softwoods, hardwoods, wood composites, metals and man-made materials used in making hand-crafted furniture. Composites would include plywood, chipboard and MDF.

Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out. The specification will detail the types of doors and drawers, the fixings and fittings to be applied and the visual appearance which should be achieved. In the context of this Unit, fitting tolerances to within +/- 3mm would be expected. Specifications will usually be provided in written form or by diagrams. A competent person should also be able to work from verbal instructions.

Tools and equipment The mallets, hammers, screwdrivers, pins, cramps and measuring devices used in the making of hand-crafted furniture. Also includes powered tools such as sanders, routers, drills and power saws as well as workshop tools and devices.

SVQs in Furniture 204 November 2010

ELEMENT 307.1 Fit drawers / Fit and attach cabinet doors

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Make doors and drawers fit within the specified tolerances for alignment and movement before fixing in position

2. Check and confirm that doors are accurately and evenly aligned

3. Make good any fitting faults which need to be dealt with for the specified quality to be achieved

4. Accurately measure, mark and position the door hinges to produce the required fit and movement characteristics

5. Accurately measure, mark and position specified fittings to produce the required alignment and ensure that movement of closed doors and drawers is minimised

6. Make sure that door and drawer fixings are firmly secured in place and lie square and true to the surface, according to the attachment method used

7. Make sure that the surrounding area of let-in fixings is free of marks and damage

8. Make sure that visible fixings, locks, catches, stays, knock-downs and supports are of an acceptable quality and finish before final fitting

9. Use tools safely and effectively

10. Work in ways which protect the item of furniture from damage

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for doors and drawers

b) the functions and uses of the different types of tools and equipment used in fitting doors and drawers

c) when and why to use marking out tools and gauges

d) different sorts of hinges, catches, stays, locks and supports used in cabinet making and their uses

e) why fittings may be removed before polishing

f) when let-in and applied fixings are used and why

g) what steps to take to ensure that doors are aligned accurately and evenly

h) how the characteristics of different wood composites affect the way fittings are attached

i) how to use manual and powered tools and equipment safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

SVQs in Furniture 205 November 2010

ELEMENT 307.2 Apply fittings to complete an item of furniture

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check and confirm that the fittings are in good order, discarding any which do not match the specification

2. Accurately measure, mark and position fittings to produce the required visual appearance

3. Make good any fitting faults which need to be dealt with for the specified quality to be achieved

4. Make sure that fittings lie true to the surface

5. Secure fittings using attachment methods and techniques that are appropriate to the nature of the fitting

6. Make sure that the surrounding area of let-in fittings is free of marks and damage

7. Make sure that visible fittings are of an acceptable quality and finish before final fitting

8. Make sure that there are no protruding pins or screws and that excess adhesive has been cleaned from the surrounds

9. Use tools safely and effectively

10. Work in ways which protect the item of furniture and glasswork from damage

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in cabinet making

b) the functions and uses of the different types of tools and equipment used in attaching cabinet fittings

c) when and why to use marking out tools and gauges

d) different sorts of fittings and their typical uses within hand-crafted furniture

e) why fittings may be removed before polishing and then re-fitted

f) when let-in and applied fittings are used and why

g) what sorts of fitting faults can arise and how to deal with them

h) the growth and handling characteristics of different species of wood used in hand-crafted furniture, the importance of this to tensile strength, compression strength, seasoning, durability, degradation, infestation and density

i) how the characteristics of different wood composites affect the way fittings are attached

j) how to use manual and powered tools and equipment safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

SVQs in Furniture 206 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 310: Assemble loose covers This Unit addresses the competence required to assemble and finish loose covers. This involves:

preparing sewing equipment and components

sewing seams and assembling covers

attaching ancillary items and finishing covers

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 310.1 Prepare sewing equipment and components 310.2 Sew seams and assemble loose covers There is also a glossary of terms which appear within the Unit and have a specific meaning.

SVQs in Furniture 207 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Item to be upholstered The items to be covered could include any of the following;

modern furniture such as an armchair or settee contract furniture such as a long seating unit, a curved/angled seating unit or chair office furniture such as a chair or reception seating

Fabric and materials The different forms of material used for loose covers. These include a range of different fabrics, including materials that require careful handing if sewing is to result in components which are properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics, plain/pile, vinyl, stretch fabrics and flat weave fabrics, as well as natural hide. In addition, materials include finishing materials used in edgings, trimmings, piping and zips.

Upholstery components The pieces of material from which a loose cover is fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. They may be simple or complex, symmetrical or asymmetrical.

Sewing equipment Sewing equipment could include lockstitch machines, long arm machines, twin needle machines, overlocking machines and multi-needle machines.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

seam stitch length and tensioning

seam type (eg straight sews, shaped sews) is correct

shape and size measurements are within +/- 3mm tolerance

pleating/quilting dimensions are to within +/- 5mm tolerance

finishing stitching (top stitching/saddle stitching) is correctly placed and formed to within +/- 3mm tolerance

Problems In relation to the preparation aspect, problems will be in relation

to the clarity of the specification, the availability of equipment, threads and other resources and the functioning and cleanliness of equipment and its parts, eg workholding devices, needles etc. In relation to the sewing process, problems will be to do with faults in the seams, rucking of the fabric, damage to fabric etc. Some of these faults may be recoverable and able to be sorted by re-working, others will be more serious. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rectifying these sorts of problems, reporting them when they cannot be dealt with quickly, safely and readily.

Ancillary items Piping, labels and zips.

SVQs in Furniture 208 November 2010

ELEMENT 310.1 Prepare sewing equipment and components

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

3. Obtain the fabric and check that it is free from defects and flaws and conforms to the specification

4. Check that the sewing equipment to be used is in a safe and functional condition and clean of grease and other sources of potential damage to fabric

5. Set up the equipment with the correct workholding devices and threads to produce the required outcomes

6. Deal promptly with any problems that arise, reporting any which you cannot solve

7. Correctly sort, identify and sequence the components ready for assembly

8. Correctly skive or notch any components that need it, so that the seams will be of the required quality

9. Carry out test sews, making adjustments as required to sort any deviations from the specification

10. Follow safe working procedures when setting up and operating powered equipment

11. Complete the preparations within the required time

12. Complete required records so that they are accurate and legible

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for soft furnishings

b) the functions and uses of the different types of sewing equipment used in soft furnishings

c) the functions and uses of the different types of foot and needle in use

d) how to handle powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

e) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

f) how to set out a work area for efficient working and the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

g) what the consequences are of lubricants and debris being left on work surfaces, tools and equipment

h) the types of equipment fault that can occur and how to recognise and deal with them

i) when and why machine, needle, foot and spool checks are carried out

j) the characteristics of different types of fabrics and how these affect the preparations that are needed before sewing and the threads to be used

k) when and why to carry out test sews, the types of faults they can show up and what adjustments are needed to deal with them

l) types of fabric, template and lay faults which occur, how they are identified and how they can be dealt with

m) what information should be recorded and why this is important

n) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 209 November 2010

ELEMENT 310.2 Sew seams and assemble upholstery covers

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check that all components are in place and correctly marked for sewing before beginning work

2. Check components and ancillary items against the specification, replacing any that are unacceptable

3. Accurately align and sew components and ancillary items in the correct sequence

4. Sew seams that are even and of the required type and tension

5. Form and complete pleats and quilting accurately according to the specification

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any recoverable faults that occur

7. Follow safe working procedures when using powered sewing equipment

8. Keep your work area tidy and protect the fabric from damage while it is being worked on

9. Accurately mark, bundle and arrange sewn work so that it is ready for passing on to the next stage

10. Complete and pass on the work within the required time

11. Complete required records so that they are accurate and legible

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling and sewing characteristics of different types of materials used as loose covers

b) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for soft furnishings

c) why it is necessary to sew components and ancillary items in the correct sequence and the consequences of not doing so

d) the types of seam and finishing stitching methods that are used in soft furnishings, the purpose of each and how to form them

e) the sorts of problems that can occur during sewing and how to deal with them

f) the types of pleating and quilting that are used in soft furnishings, the purpose of each and how to form them

g) how to handle powered tools safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

h) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

i) the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

j) why it is important to be accurate in marking sewn work

k) what information should be recorded and why this is important

SVQs in Furniture 210 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 311: Fit and finish top covers This Unit addresses the competence required to apply and fit top covers in upholstery. This involves:

Measuring and cutting fabric to fit an item of furniture

Applying and fitting the top cover to the item of furniture to include either fluting or buttoning

Trimming and finishing upholstery to specification

Working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 311.1 Prepare a cutting plan for a top cover 311.2 Apply and fit a top cover 311.3 Trim and finish upholstery There is also a scope statement, which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 211 November 2010

Scope statement The following items have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Buttoning & Fluting Fluting, float and deep-buttoning are all covered by this

unit.

Components The pieces of material from which an upholstery cover is fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods; they may be simple or complex, symmetrical or asymmetrical.

Fabric/materials The different forms of materials used for upholstery covers. These include a range of different fabrics, including materials that require careful handling if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics with a minimum pattern repeat of 25cm, plain and patterned pile, stretch fabrics and flat weave fabrics, as well as natural hide. In addition, materials are used for the covering of buttons.

Fixing methods This Unit covers the use of hand sewing, stapling and tacking methods of fixing upholstery components in place.

Item to be upholstered The items to be upholstered include seats, inside and outside arms, inside and outside backs, base finishes, linings, facings, borders and cushions.

Problems In relation to the cutting of fabrics, these will be to do with flaws, distortions and colour/pattern variations in the fabric, inaccurate measurements and mis-alignments. In relation to the assembly and sewing process, these will be to do with slipping, fraying, inaccuracies, poor seam quality and machine faults. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rectifying these types of problems in ways which ensure that the quality of the outcome is not compromised.

Sewing This Unit covers both machine and hand sewing. Typically, hand sewing would be used in relation to the under-edge of seats or backs, arm scrolls, buttoning and fluting.

Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material cutting and shaping accuracy is to within +/- 5mm, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting

component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm Trimmings and finishings This Unit covers the assembly of flange cord, ruche,

piping and fastenings into components.

SVQs in Furniture 212 November 2010

Tools and equipment This Unit covers the use of cutting equipment including knives, shears and scalpels, measuring and marking equipment and both hand sewing equipment and sewing machines.

SVQs in Furniture 213 November 2010

ELEMENT 311.1 Prepare a cutting plan for a top cover

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Take accurate and complete measurements of the shape and dimensions of the item to be upholstered

2. Record the measurements clearly and accurately

3. Plan the cutting of the fabric so as to minimise waste and take account of the design characteristics and handling implications of the fabric to be used

4. Measure and mark out and cut the components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits for the fabric being used

5. Ensure fabric placement and alignment is appropriate for the type and number of components required and the fabric characteristics

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

7. Follow safe working procedures when using sharp tools and items of equipment

8. Protect the fabric from damage while it is being worked on

9. Make sure that the components are clearly and accurately marked for correct assembly and fitting

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials used as upholstery covers and bottom cloths

b) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

c) how many measurements and of which dimensions are needed to ensure accurate cutting and fitting in respect of different types of component

d) which markers are most appropriate to use for different types of upholstery fabric

e) what cutting tolerances are appropriate for different types of component and in what ways this may be influenced by fabric type

f) what the implications are of not properly placing and aligning fabric before cutting it

g) why it is important to minimise waste

h) how to take account of design characteristics such as pattern repeats and pile direction in planning cutting

i) the sorts of problems that can occur during marking out and cutting fabric and how to deal with them

j) the functions and uses of the different types of measuring and marking and cutting tools

k) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

l) what steps should be taken to protect fabric from damage

m) the implications for your work of the current Furnishings Regulations

n) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 214 November 2010

ELEMENT 311.2 Apply and fit a top cover

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately place the components in their previous fitting position

2. Make sure that components are correctly orientated and aligned to meet fabric, pattern and design requirements

3. Attach the components in an efficient sequence, position and form pleats, darts and/or collars to ensure that the finished component will lie correctly

4. Use fixing methods which are appropriate to the type of component

5. Attach the components securely and to the required shape, contour lines, tension and finish

6. Locate, fit and secure buttons accurately in their correct positions

7. Make sure that the bottom cloth is accurately, neatly and firmly secured

8. Check and confirm that there are no protruding or sharp fixings on the finished item

9. Check and confirm that the visual appearance of the upholstered item meets the specification

10. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

11. Follow safe working practices when using fixing tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different fabrics and how this can affect their behaviour during positioning and fixing

b) why the sequence in which components are attached is important to the efficiency of the process and the quality of the outcome achieved

c) when and why pleats, darts and collars may be formed on upholstery components

d) when and why sorts of fixing methods are used

e) how buttons are attached and the different uses of float and deep-buttoning methods

f) why it is important to ensure that the bottom cover is accurately, neatly and firmly secured

g) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

h) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

i) when and why to carry out checks to confirm that there are no sharp or protruding fixings

j) the implications for your work of the current Furnishings Regulations

k) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 215 November 2010

ELEMENT 311.3 Trim and finish upholstery

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately position trimmings to give the required visual appearance

2. Securely attach the trimmings using methods which will give the required durability and appearance

3. Make sure that there are no loose ends or visible stitchings

4. Apply decorative nails and studs in the required pattern and spacing

5. Follow an efficient sequence when applying decorative nails and studs

6. Make sure that castors and gliders are secured using fixings which will give the required strength

7. Make sure that castors and gliders are in the correct positions to give the required stability and range of movement

8. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

9. Work in ways which protect yourself and others from risk of injury

To do this you need to know:

a) what sorts of trimmings and finishings are used in traditional upholstery and why

b) when and why different fixing methods are used for traditional upholstery trimmings

c) how to make sure that patterns and spacing of decorative nails are accurate and what role the sequence of application plays in that

d) what methods of fixing will give castors and gliders the appropriate strength for their purpose

e) the principles which underlie the positioning of castors and gliders for stability and movement

f) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

g) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

h) the implications for your work of the current Furnishings Regulations

i) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 216 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 313: Produce cushions and/or bolsters and padded items This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare components and produce cushions and/or bolsters and padded materials. This involves:

measuring and cutting fabrics and padding to made a padded item

sewing the components together to make a padded item

trimming and finishing the padded item

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 313.1 Prepare components for a cushion, bolster and/or padded item 313.2 Sew components 313.3 Finish a padded item There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 217 November 2010

Scope statements

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Components The pieces of material and padding from which a cushion,

bolster or other padded item is fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. Examples of sewing method could include straight, shaped sews and seams involving simple pleating.

Filling materials Different types of filling components including foam, kapok, loose wadding, polystyrene beads, feathers and down.

Fabrics The different forms of material used for making padded treatments. These include a range of different fabric, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics with a minimum pattern repeat of 25cm, plain and patterned pile, flat weave fabrics.

Fixing methods This Unit covers the use of hand sewing, including slip stitch, ladder stitch and hemming stitch. Machine sewing including flat and flat fell seams. Gluing, tacking and stapling where appropriate.

Problems In relation to the cutting of fabrics, these will be to do with flaws, distortions and colour/pattern variations in the fabric, inaccurate measurements and mis-alignments. In relation to the fillings flaws and distortions. In relation to the assembly and sewing process, these will be to do slipping, fraying, inaccuracies, poor seam quality and equipment faults. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rectifying these types of problems in ways which ensure that the quality of the outcome is not compromised.

Sewing This Unit covers both machine and hand sewing.

Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material cutting and shaping accuracy is to within +/- 5mm, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm

Trimmings and edgings This Unit covers the assembly of cushions, bolsters and

other padded items and the trimmings that can be used in the finished item. Including corded and flanged edging, ties, zips and button fastenings.

SVQs in Furniture 218 November 2010

Tools and equipment This Unit covers the use of cutting equipment including knives, shears and scalpels, measuring and marking equipment and both hand sewing equipment including scissors, pins, needles, thread, tailor‟s chalk, bodkin and sewing machines.

SVQs in Furniture 219 November 2010

ELEMENT 313.1 Prepare components for a cushion, bolster and/or padded item

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep the work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

3. Plan the cutting of the fabric and filling material so as to minimise waste and take account of the design characteristics and handling implications of the fabric and filling to be used

4. Measure and mark out the components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits for the fabric and filling being used

5. Ensure fabric placement and alignment is appropriate for the type and number of components required and the fabric characteristics

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

7. Follow safe working procedures when using sharp tools and items of equipment

8. Protect the fabric and filling material from damage while it is being worked on

9. Make sure that the components are clearly and accurately marked where necessary

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for padded items

b) the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials and fillings used in padded items

c) how many measurements and of which dimension are needed to ensure accurate cutting and fitting in respect of different types of component

d) which markers are most appropriate to use for different types of fabric and filling materials

e) what cutting tolerances are appropriate for different types of component and in what ways this may be influenced by fabric and filling type

f) what the implications are of not properly placing and aligning fabric and filling before cutting it

g) why it is important to minimise waste

h) how to take account of design characteristics such as pattern repeats and pile direction in planning cutting

i) the sorts of problems that can occur during marking out and cutting fabric and fillings and how to deal with them

j) the functions and uses of the different types of measuring and marking tools

k) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

l) what steps should be taken to protect fabric and fillings from damage

SVQs in Furniture 220 November 2010

ELEMENT 313.2 Sew components

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately place the all materials and components in their correct position

2. Make sure that components are correctly orientated and aligned to meet fabric, pattern and design requirements

3. Attach the fabric components in an efficient sequence

4. Use sewing methods which are appropriate to the type of fabric component

5. Attach the fabric components together securely and to the required shape, and finish

6. Locate, sew and secure fabric components as appropriate

7. Insert filling materials by appropriate method

8. Check and confirm that there are no protruding or sharp fixings on the finished padded item

9. Check and confirm that there are no loose threads on the finished padded item

10. Check and confirm that the visual appearance of the padded item meets the specification

11. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

12. Follow safe working practices when using fixing tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different fabrics and fillings and how this can affect their behaviour during positioning and fixing

b) why the sequence in which components are attached is important to the efficiency of the process and the quality of the outcome achieved

c) when and why different types of fillings may be used in padded items

d) when and why sorts of seeming methods are used

e) how fillings are inserted and the different uses of padded items

f) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

g) when and why to carry out checks to confirm that there are no sharp or protruding fixings

h) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

i) your personal responsibilities with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 221 November 2010

ELEMENT 313.3 Finish a padded item

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need to complete the specification

2. Check that you have the required finishing specification and that it is complete

3. Assemble components using appropriate method

4. Attach components using appropriate fixing method

5. Accurately position any trimmings to give the required visual appearance

6. Securely attach the trimmings using methods which will give the required durability and appearance

7. Make sure that there are no loose ends or visible stitchings

8. Follow an efficient sequence when applying trimmings

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working procedures at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) what sorts of trimmings are used in padded items and why

b) when and why different finishing methods are used for padded items

c) terms used in technical specifications for padded items

d) why the sequence in which the components are attached is of importance to the appearance of the finished padded item

e) how to make sure that patterns and spacing of finishings are accurate and what role the sequence of application plays in that

f) what sorts of problems can arise and how to deal with them

g) who to report unsolvable problems to

h) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 222 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 314: Install and dress soft furnishings

This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare for, install and dress the soft furnishings in their final location. This involves:

interpreting information

making the installation area ready for work

preparing the soft furnishings and associated components for assembly

ensuring all resources are ready for use

working in ways that ensure your own and other‟s safety There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 314.1 Prepare the location for soft furnishing assembly 314.2 Prepare and select tools, equipment and components for installation 314.3 Install and dress the soft furnishing There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 223 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Customer The customer for soft furnishings that are assembled in

location may be an individual or an organisation.

Components Components used in the installation of soft furnishings will differ according to the finished specification, but could include:

hidden hanging systems, including fixed systems, tracks, valance rails and corded rails

decorative hanging systems, including wooden, brass, and iron systems

pelmets, valances, tie-backs, holdbacks, ropes, tassels and other trimming/finishings

Location The location is any interior within a property owned by the

customer. It may be bare of other furniture and furnishings or furnished.

Problems Problems may occur with any aspect of the materials, tools, equipment, components or the location. Solving them may require direct action by the individual carrying out the work, reference to a specification, authority within the organisation and/or action by the customer or a combination of all.

Resource The resources covered by this Unit address materials, tools and equipment.

Typical materials within soft furnishings assembly would include:

finishes and trimmings

adhesives

fixings

any other ancillary items needed to complete the specification

Typical tools and equipment within soft furnishing installation would include:

hand tools (eg hammer, screw driver etc)

soft furnisher equipment (eg scissors, pins, needles, thread etc)

battery powered tools (eg drill, screw driver etc)

electric powered tools and power cables, portable generators and transformers

Specification The specification for the location assembly will have been

agreed with the customer. It will typically detail:

the exact location within the customer‟s property where the soft furnishing is to be assembled and installed

the dimensions, construction and finishing of the soft furnishing resource requirements

It may be written and/or involve drawings and work lists.

SVQs in Furniture 224 November 2010

ELEMENT 314.1 Prepare the location for soft furnishing assembly

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Confirm with the relevant people the location, schedule and sequence of the assembly work

2. Obtain agreement to proceed before starting work

3. Isolate the work area as much as possible from the rest of the location, protecting areas exposed to damage and/or debris

4. If necessary, ask the customer to remove vulnerable items from the work area and access routes to it

5. Where appropriate, erect and install access equipment

6. Prepare the work area correctly and safely ready to install soft furnishing

7. Establish safe and secure storage areas for resources and components until needed

8. Follow safe and effective working practices at all times

9. Identify correctly any problems relating to the installation and deal with them in line with standard operating procedures

10. Maintain effective communication with the customer in line with customer care procedures

To do this you need to know:

a) how to interpret work specifications including drawings

b) who to confirm work requirements with and why it is important to have all the required agreements before you begin

c) which areas of the location should be isolated and what are suitable protective coverings

d) what types of vulnerable object should be moved by the customer

e) why it is important to prepare the work area so that it is safe to work in for yourself and others

f) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to Health and safety issues whilst in location

g) when would it be necessary to set up storage areas and what are the safety and security issues to consider

h) what sort of problems can occur on location and how you should deal with them

i) how to provide information clearly to a customer, what type of information do customers require, and why it could be important to them

SVQs in Furniture 225 November 2010

ELEMENT 314.2 Prepare and select tools, equipment and components for installation

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Confirm that the specifications, equipment , resources and components are available

2. Make sure that the correct quality and quantity of components and resources are taken to the location

3. Confirm that all the specified tools and items of equipment are present and are in a safe working order

4. Accurately identify any problems with resources and components and deal with them in line with standard operating procedures

5. Carry out any specified preparatory work on components and materials correctly

6. Follow safe and effective working practices at all times

7. Lay out resources and components in a logical order for effective working

8. Ensure that resources and components which are not for immediate use are stored safely

9. Maintain effective communication with the customer in line with customer care procedures

To do this you need to know:

a) how to read and interpret specifications use for soft furnishing installation

b) what sorts of resources are needed for soft furnishings assembly in a location and what preparation processes may be needed at the location

c) what different components need to be assembled in location, and what forms of preparation may be needed

d) what sorts of tools and equipment are typically needed

e) what sort of problems can occur and how should they be dealt with

f) what your personal responsibilities are towards health and safety when at location with regard to health and safety legislation

g) why it is good practice to ensure that resources and components are laid out in a logical order and that items that are not needed immediately are safely stored until use

h) how to provide information clearly to a customer, what type of information do customers require, and why it could be important to them

SVQs in Furniture 226 November 2010

ELEMENT 314.3 Install and dress the soft furnishing

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Confirm that the specifications, equipment , resources and components are available

2. Follow the specification instructions accurately

3. Install the soft furnishing using the appropriate method

4. Confirm that the method used is appropriate

5. Securely attach the soft furnishing using methods which will give the required durability and appearance

6. Make sure there are no loose ends or visible stitching

7. Follow an efficient sequence when applying any trimmings

8. Check that the finished soft furnishing conforms to the specification

9. Follow safe and effective working practices at all times

10. Lay out resources and components in a logical order for effective working

11. Ensure that resources and components which are not for immediate use are stored safely

12. Maintain effective communication with the customer in line with customer care procedures

To do this you need to know:

a) how to read and interpret specifications used for soft furnishing installation

b) how to read and interpret specifications for trimming and finishing soft furnishings

c) what types of resources are needed for soft furnishings assembly in a location

d) what different methods of assembly are used and why

e) different methods of trimming and finishing soft furnishings

f) what sorts of tools and equipment are typically needed

g) what sort of problems can occur and how should they be dealt with

h) what your personal responsibilities are towards health and safety when at location

i) why it is good practice to ensure that resources and components are laid out in a logical order and that items that are not needed immediately are safely stored until use

j) how to provide information clearly to a customer, what type of information customers require, and why it could be important to them

SVQs in Furniture 227 November 2010

Commentary for Unit: 319 Replicate/restore wooden components of furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to make wooden components for hand-crafted furniture. This involves:

cutting, shaping and moulding components

cutting joints

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety

dismantling, replacing and replication of wooden components

There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 319.1 Disassemble parts and/or sections 319.2 Replicate parts and assemble There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 228 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Adhesives Commercially available glues used in making traditional

and modern hand-crafted furniture. These include polyvinyl acetate, urea or phenol formaldehyde, animal based glues, and resorcinol.

Components The pieces from which an assembly within hand-crafted furniture is constructed, which could include a replica of an original part.

Cutting Using saws (eg tenon, dovetail or band), planes (eg jack, smoothing, block, scraper, rebate, shoulder or bullnose), chisels (eg bevel-edged, mortice, firmer and paring) and routers.

Joints The joints used in making hand-crafted furniture. They include insertion, scarf, rub joints, knock-down, dove-tail, mitred dove-tail, mortise and tenon, mitred tenon, bridle, lap, mitre, tongue and groove, loose tongue, housing, dowel and butt joints.

Materials The softwoods, hardwoods and wood composites used in making/restoring traditional and modern furniture. Composites would include plywood, chipboard and MDF. Woods may be of an oily or resinous nature, have a ripple or interlocking grain and be of a burr or pippy structure. Breakers to be used where available.

Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the qualities (colour, grain, replica of finish and marks) of the materials to be used, the nature of the joints to be made and the tolerances to be achieved. In the context of this Unit, tolerances to within (0.5mm) would be expected. Specifications will usually be provided by verbal, written form or by diagrams from research. A competent person should also be able to work from verbal instructions.

Techniques The techniques covered by this Unit are drilling, boring, sawing, planing, moulding, scraping, abrading, splicing and matching.

Tools and Equipment The hand and powered tools used in the making of hand crafted furniture, including basic fixed and portable wood working machinery. Hand tools could include chisels, planes, cramps, saws, drills, drill bits, squares, mallets, scrapers, honing stones, knives, gauges as well as workshop tools and devices such as bench hooks, winding sticks, shooting boards, mitre blocks of different angles, scratch stock. Examples of powered tools would include sanders, routers, drills and saws. Examples of machinery would include lathes, presses, bandsaw, surface planer and thicknesser. Examples of equipment would include glue pots, cramping jigs, iron.

SVQs in Furniture 229 November 2010

ELEMENT 319.1 Disassemble parts and/or sections

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment and adhesives you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Make sure that you have clear and complete details of the specification to be met

3. Select new patinated materials which will meet the requirements of the work specification

4. Use appropriate dismantling tools and techniques for removal of materials.

5. Accurately measure and mark out lines/profiles to be made to within the specified tolerances

6. Use effective techniques to check alignment of surfaces.

7. Check and confirm that moulded components have the required contour

8. Minimise waste in your choice of materials and in how you measure and mark them out for cutting

9. Handle the materials and components in ways that avoid damaging them

10. Cut and replace parts accurately to size and shape, keeping within the required tolerances

11. Use tools safely and effectively

14. Return tools and equipment to the correct storage locations when not in use

15. Dispose of wastes safely to the designated location

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for component production and assembly

b) the functions and uses of the different types of tools and equipment used in furniture assembly

c) what personal protective equipment to use and why

d) how to set out a work area for efficient working and the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

e) the availability and working practices of different species of wood used in hand-crafted furniture, the importance of this to tensile strength, compression strength, seasoning, durability, degradation, infestation and density

f) what kinds of flaws would affect the utility of a piece of wood within furniture construction

g) why it is important to work with the grain of wood and the implications of not doing so

h) how the characteristics of different wood composites affect the way they are cut and handled

i) what the consequences are of inaccurate measuring and cutting

j) what the consequences are of using blunt tools and poor technique when shaping materials

k) how to use manual and powered tools and equipment safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

l) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

m) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation.

n) how to handle adhesives safely, including the use of appropriate personal protective equipment and adequate ventilation

SVQs in Furniture 230 November 2010

ELEMENT 319.2 Replicate parts and assemble

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. Select the materials to be used in the correct face and grain alignment

3. Check that materials are free from flaws which might affect their suitability for use in replication and discard any that are not

4. Make sure that you have clear and complete details of the components/joints to be produced

5. Use an appropriate template to measure, mark out and control the dimensions of the cuts

6. Cut the components/joints accurately to within the required tolerances

7. Check and confirm that components/joints fit correctly before making them permanent

8. Clean and sand the components as required so that they can be effectively worked

9. Use the correct adhesives and pressure when gluing materials.

10. Deal promptly and effectively with any component/joint faults that arise

11. Check and confirm that the finished joint/components meet the specified quality for alignment shape and grain orientation

12. Use re-assembly tools safely and effectively

13. Return tools and equipment to the correct storage locations when not in use

14. Dispose of wastes safely to the designated location

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for joints

b) the functions and uses of the different types of tools and equipment used in furniture assembly

c) what personal protective equipment to use and why

d) how to set out a work area for efficient working and the health and safety issues that can arise if a work area is disorganised and untidy

e) the growth and handling characteristics of different species of wood used in furniture, the importance of this to abrasion, tensile strength, compression strength, seasoning, durability, degradation, infestation and density

f) what kinds of flaws would affect the utility of a piece of wood within furniture construction

g) why it is important to work with the grain of wood and the implications of not doing so

h) how the characteristics of different wood composites affect the way they are cut and their suitability for different joint constructions

i) what the consequences are of inaccurate measuring and cutting

j) the mechanics of joint construction

k) the limitations of different jointing components and alternative jointing techniques that can be used

l) methods of mechanical cutting with templates

m) how to use manual and powered tools and equipment safely in ways that protect yourself and others from risk

n) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation.

o) how to handle adhesives safely, including the use of appropriate personal protective equipment

SVQs in Furniture 231 November 2010

and adequate ventilation

p) what your personal limitations are in respect of the PUWER regulations 1998

SVQs in Furniture 232 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 351: Improve process and quality control in a commercial environment This Unit addresses the competence required to improve process and quality control in a commercial environment in the furniture, furnishings and interiors industry. This involves:

identifying areas where improvements could be made to work processes and quality

suggesting improvements to work processes and quality

identifying potential developments elsewhere (troubleshooting)

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 351.1 Identify and suggest improvements in the workplace, concerning work processes and quality 351.2 Troubleshooting There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 233 November 2010

Scope statements

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Procedures Organisational specifications of how to carry out work

activities in a manner that will ensure the required outcomes if the procedure is followed accurately. Standards of performance.

Resources A range of resources which are used in any activity. These could include:

methods for identifying improvements

quality control, analysis methods

methods of review

information, documentation and specifications

materials

tools

equipment

Work Objectives This Unit is suitable for any aspect of work within the furniture, furnishings and interiors industry. Objectives are typically described in terms of the following considerations:

quantity

quality

cost

time

safety, health and environment

Others People who are either working with the individual or are directly affected by his/her work. This includes colleagues and line management. Those in the organisation who have the authority to change procedures/practice.

Problems Problems in working relations may be able to be readily dealt with or may require additional support obtained through following organisational procedures.

Work area The work area is any area where the individual is working, either on a temporary or permanent basis.

SVQs in Furniture 234 November 2010

ELEMENT 351.1 Identify and suggest improvements in the workplace concerning work processes and quality

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Monitor and review existing quality control methods in the workplace

2. Monitor and review existing work procedures and work objectives

3. Identify possible developments in the system, in work processes and quality

4. Specify and recommend potential developments to the existing work system

5. Ensure that these recommendations can be realistically achieved using available resources

6. Submit recommendations to the relevant others in the organisation

7. Check that these developments will meet all current health and safety considerations

To do this you need to know:

a) methods of monitoring quality control in the work operation

b) methods of monitoring work processes in the operation

c) other methods of monitoring quality and work processes

d) current standards of workplace performance

e) how to review the information gained against current standards of performance

f) how to present the information gained from the analysis of workplace performance

g) to whom in the organisation the information should be presented

h) current health and safety considerations in the workplace

SVQs in Furniture 235 November 2010

ELEMEMT 351.2 Troubleshooting

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Collect information and feedback on current working practices and procedures

2. Assess current working practices and procedures against agreed standards of performance

3. Identify opportunities for improving current working practices and procedures

4. Make realistic suggestions for improvements to working practices and procedures

5. Show what benefits could be achieved from improvements

6. Present suggestions for improvement in accordance with organisational procedures

7. Take into consideration all current health and safety guidelines

To do this you need to know:

a) methods of collecting information on current working practice and procedures

b) sources of information on working practices and procedures within the organisation

c) how to compare the information against agreed standards of performance

d) current work improvement techniques and methods

e) how to present the information and show the benefits to be gained

f) to whom in the organisation the information should be presented

g) current health and safety considerations in the workplace

SVQs in Furniture 236 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 352: Define and develop standard operating procedures within the furniture, furnishings and interiors industry This Unit addresses the competence required to develop standard operating procedures (SOPs) for production activities within the furniture, furnishings and interiors industry. This involves:

defining procedures

testing procedures

getting agreement to adopt procedures There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 352.1 Devise standard operating procedures 352.2 Test and agree standard operating procedures There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 237 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Standard Operating Procedures Written specifications of how to carry out certain defined

production activities in a manner that will ensure the required outcomes if the procedure is followed accurately. This Unit covers the development of new and substantially revised standard operating procedures.

Information A range of information sources would be drawn upon in devising a procedure. These could include:

input and advise from specialists

manufacturer/supplier data for equipment and materials

results of risk assessments

production target requirements

Objectives A standard operating procedure would typically be prepared to meet with organisational requirements in the areas of:

quantity

quality

cost

time

safety, health and environment

Relevant people People who have expertise in and/or responsibility for the areas of work affected by the procedure. This is likely to include colleagues with production, safety, health and environment and quality specialisms.

Tests Trials carried out to ensure that a proposed procedure will meet the required objectives. Tests need to be designed to cover the full range of conditions under which the procedure would be expected to apply and be repeated often enough to provide reliable evidence that the procedure works. Tests are normally carried out by third parties who have not been responsible for devising the procedure in order to maximise the objectivity of the tests.

SVQs in Furniture 238 November 2010

ELEMENT 352.1 Devise standard operating procedures

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Establish the scope of the procedure to be drafted and the objectives which it is to meet

2. Obtain all relevant information for use in drafting the procedure

3. Extract and include sufficient detail in the procedure to ensure it will be implemented as intended

4. Design the procedure to meet the required quantity, quality, time and cost objectives

5. Draft the procedure in a clear, concise and logical format

6. Make sure that the procedure complies fully with all pertinent safety, health and environmental considerations

7. Seek initial feedback and comment on the draft procedure from relevant people

8. Evaluate and incorporate feedback that serves to strengthen the draft procedure

To do this you need to know:

a) why standard operating procedures are used within the furniture, furnishings and interiors industry

b) what the justification is for the level of detail included in a standard operating procedure

c) what sources of information should be used when drafting a standard operating procedure

d) who is involved in establishing the scope and objectives of a procedure

e) how to evaluate alternatives and the consequences of different facets of a procedure when trying to ensure that objectives will be met

f) what safety, health and environment hazards are associated with the activity being described in the procedure and how to build the outcomes of risk assessments into a procedure

g) who it would be appropriate to approach to obtain initial feedback on a procedure

h) what factors to take into account in evaluating whether feedback provided should lead to amendments to a draft procedure

SVQs in Furniture 239 November 2010

ELEMENT 352.2 Test and agree standard operating procedures

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Obtain the correct authority to carry out tests before starting

2. Make sure that those who will carry out the tests have a clear and thorough understanding of the procedure and sufficient expertise in the activity to ensure that the test is conducted effectively

3. Design the tests to ensure they provide thorough, reliable and valid evidence of the effectiveness of the procedure under a range of typical conditions

4. Conduct the tests in a safe and cost-effective manner

5. Keep accurate and complete records of the tests conducted, the conditions under which they were run and the results obtained

6. Accurately and objectively evaluate the test results to identify any adjustments necessary to achieve the required objectives

7. Improve the procedure as a result of feedback from the tests

8. Report on and agree the revised procedure with the appropriate authority

9. Make sure that the agreed procedure is duly recorded

To do this you need to know:

a) why it is important to obtain authorisation before beginning a test

b) why it is generally considered beneficial for tests to be conducted by an independent party

c) what steps need to be taken to ensure that a test is reliable, valid and thorough and what the implications are of not conducting reliable, valid and thorough tests

d) why it is important to keep accurate and complete test records and what data they should contain

e) why it is important to be objective and accurate in evaluating the effectiveness of a procedure and deciding on how to improve it

f) how to communicate information effectively in writing and verbally to different groups of people

g) what formats should be followed for reporting on, recording and gaining formal agreement to a standard operating procedure

SVQs in Furniture 240 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 355: Produce and maintain jigs and templates

This Unit addresses the competence required to produce and maintain jigs and templates for use within furniture production. This involves:

measuring and marking out accurately

maintenance of surfaces and edges

using cutting and shaping tools and equipment

working in ways that ensure your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 355.1 Produce jigs and templates 355.2 Maintain jigs and templates There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 241 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Damage Problems and faults may occur in the production or

maintenance of jigs and templates. Some problems may be serious enough to mean that the jig or template cannot be used as intended; other problems may simply mean some additional maintenance is needed before it can be used (eg cleaning). Solving problems may require direct action by the individual carrying out the work or reference to an authority within the organisation.

Jigs A jig is used for guiding a tool, such as a cutting blade, so that the position of a cut or drill hole (for example) is positionally accurate. Jigs may be simple, (eg straight lines, limited numbers of positions), or complex (eg complicated angles and curves, and multiple positions).

Materials

Jigs and templates may be made of wood, metal or plastic.

Templates Templates are used in the furniture industry to ensure that shapes can consistently be reproduced to accurate dimensions. A template is only as good as its ability to reproduce the required shape and size over a specified number of occasions. Some templates are intended for single use, but the majority are used on numerous occasions. As with jigs, templates may be used for the reproduction of simple shapes or complex ones.

SVQs in Furniture 242 November 2010

ELEMENT 355.1 Produce jigs and templates

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Make sure that you have an accurate and complete work specification to follow

2. Select materials of a suitable size for the item to be produced

3. Be accurate in measuring and marking out

4. Make efficient use of materials and minimise wastes

5. Handle jigs and templates in ways that protect them from damage

6. Cut, shape and finish jigs and templates to the specified requirements

7. Work efficiently in ways that avoid having to re-work areas of the jig or template

8. Store completed jigs and templates under suitable conditions to keep them in good order

9. Keep clear and accurate records of the details of completed jigs and templates

10. Follow safe and effective working practices at all times, in line with current health and safety legislation

To do this you need to know:

a) how to read and interpret technical specifications, including drawings, correctly, including the meanings of abbreviations, symbols and units of measurement

b) what different materials are used in the furniture, furnishings and interiors sector to produce jigs and templates for cutting, laying up and shaping wood and metal components

c) how to establish a suitable datum so that your measurements are accurate in all dimensions

d) what techniques are used to produce jigs and templates

e) why the sequence of actions used to produce a jig or template is important to efficiency

f) what steps to take to protect jigs and templates from common forms of damage and why it is important to do this

g) how to protect jigs and templates and what sort of conditions they require to be kept in if they are to stay in good order

h) what sorts of records need to be kept and why it is important that they are accurate and clear

i) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

SVQs in Furniture 243 November 2010

ELEMENT 355.2 Maintain jigs and templates

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Routinely examine jigs and templates for signs of damage

2. Use the correct specifications to check jigs and templates

3. Take account of feedback from users when assessing whether or not jigs and templates are suitable for continuing use

4. Accurately identify damage that affects the use of a jig or template

5. Deal safely and promptly with damage that can be effectively repaired

6. Clean jigs and templates using methods and equipment that are suited to that purpose

7. Remove and report jigs and templates which are damaged beyond use

8. Follow safe and effective working practices at all times, in line with current health and safety legislation

9. Keep accurate, clear and up to date records of jig and template checks and maintenance

To do this you need to know:

a) why it is important to examine jigs and templates on a routine basis

b) how to read and interpret technical specifications, including drawings, correctly, including the meanings of abbreviations, symbols and units of measurement

c) what sorts of damage can occur to jigs and templates used with different types of furniture production equipment

d) what the tolerance levels are that you must work to when assessing if a jig or template is beyond use

e) what sort of damage you are competent to repair and when to seek assistance

f) why it is important to use appropriate solvents, cleaning materials and cleaning agents when cleaning jigs and templates

g) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

h) what sorts of records need to be kept and why it is important that they are accurate, clear and up to date

SVQs in Furniture 244 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 357: Produce furniture design prototypes

This Unit addresses the competence required to produce prototypes of furniture designs. This involves:

interpreting information

selecting methods to monitor and control the process of producing a prototype

selecting materials, methods and techniques

evaluating and reporting on prototypes

working in ways that ensure your own and others‟ safety This Unit contains two elements: 357.1 Plan and monitor realisation processes 357.2 Realise and evaluate prototypes. There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

NB: This Unit is a tailored version of a Unit produced by the Small Firms Development Initiative (SFEDI) following its Standards Review in 2000. The Unit is designated 3P and is an optional Unit within the Designer Standards level 3 N/SVQ.

SVQs in Furniture 245 November 2010

Scope statements

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Evaluation Evaluation is the systematic assessment of a prototype to

identify whether or not a design will meet its objectives. Evaluation can be qualitative (in which case it measures perceptions such as visual appearance or tactile features etc) or quantitative (in which case it makes use of measurable characteristics such as strength, flexibility, torsion etc).

Design objectives Any design has a number of objectives which it sets out to meet in terms of such features as form, functionality, performance, ease of use, costs. These will be specified in the brief given to the person whose role it is to produce the prototype.

Problems Problems can occur in any part of the realisation and evaluation processes. They may arise from the materials and methods used to produce and/or evaluate the prototype, and may be technical (eg an inability to conform to the design as specified or operational (eg an inability to complete the realisation process in the timescale. The person carrying out this role would be expected to deal promptly with problems they were competent to resolve, reporting others to a higher authority.

Prototypes Prototypes are 2D and 3D models, mock-ups, samples or test pieces made using small-scale realisation techniques. They are produced since designers need to understand how their final design will be made, function and perform to check that their ideas will work in practice and be suitable for the client. Prototypes may be made at any stage of the design development cycle.

Realisation techniques and processes

Small scale realisation techniques cover preparing, forming, joining, assembling, manipulating, editing and finishing the prototype ready for evaluation.

SVQs in Furniture 246 November 2010

ELEMENT 357.1 Plan and monitor realisation processes

In carrying out this work you must:

1. identify and agree the aims for realising a design prototype with others involved in the project

2. select suitable media, materials and associated tools, equipment, techniques and processes to meet design objectives

3. plan and organise the resources needed to realise a viable prototype and to meet deadlines

4. monitor the realisation process to ensure that the prototype matches design and functional specifications

5. respond appropriately to any unforeseen problems encountered during the realisation process

To do this you need to know:

a) how to predict the opportunities and constraints involved in realising a prototype

b) how to select suitable media, materials and associated tools, equipment, techniques and processes

c) how to estimate skills and time required for realisation

d) how to schedule stages of work to meet deadlines

e) how to monitor progress against plans

f) how to interpret and meet design objectives and client requirements

g) what design and functional specifications need to be met

h) what the features, potential, limitations, availability and uses are of media, materials and associated tools, equipment, techniques and processes used within the furniture industry

i) how project constraints and deadlines (eg costs, time, technical and performance standards and quality parameters) are specified and what your responsibilities are for meeting them

j) what regulations, environmental and health and safety considerations in the use of materials, processes and technology you are required to meet

k) what health and safety procedures to follow in the studio or workplace including the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

SVQs in Furniture 247 November 2010

ELEMENT 357.2 Realise and evaluate prototypes

In carrying out this work you must:

1. use small-scale realisation techniques and processes safely and with skill and creativity

2. realise the prototype to an adequate standard that enables evaluation to take place

3. identify and carry out an evaluation process that enables the prototype to be judged in terms of the agreed aims

4. analyse the results of the evaluation process and structure arguments in support of conclusions drawn

5. communicate the results of the evaluation process to relevant people

To do this you need to know:

a) how to carry out small-scale realisation techniques appropriate to your specialisation b) how to work safely and efficiently in a studio or workplace c) how to plan and carry out evaluation techniques to meet agreed aims (eg related to design

objectives, specifications, client requirements and technical constraints of final design realisation) d) how to gather and record data to support evaluation decisions (eg about performance, function,

ease of use and user/audience response)

e) how to prepare and present evaluation reports

f) what the features, potential, limitations, availability and uses are of media, materials and

associated tools, equipment and techniques and processes used in producing furniture design prototypes

g) what health and safety procedures to follow in the studio or workplace including the implications

for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

h) what practical testing techniques can be applied (eg for materials, technology, designs and

products)

i) what evaluation techniques are usually applied in the furniture industry and what the uses and limitations are of different qualitative and quantitative approaches

SVQs in Furniture 248 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 358: Produce furniture production specifications FFINTO Unit derived from OSCEng HLS 1.1.2 This Unit addresses the competence required to produce furniture production specifications. This involves:

producing a specification for a product

ensuring that the specification meets a client‟s needs

recording all relevant information There is one element in this Unit, which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 358.1 Produce specifications for furniture products (OSCEng 1.1.2) There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

IMPORTANT NOTE

This is a Furniture, Furnishings and Interiors NTO tailored Unit derived from the Engineering Occupational Standards for Higher levels Unit number 1.1.2 as produced by the Occupational Standards Council for Engineering (OSCEng).

The Unit was originally developed by OSCEng as a generic template to address a broad range of engineering contexts. As such, the original text makes reference to the requirement to “Produce a specification for the engineering product or process that meets the requirements of the client”. In the context in which this Unit is used within the Furniture, Furnishings and Interiors sector, the term “engineering product or process” should be understood to mean any furniture item to be produced on a commercial basis, to meet given client requirements. This may involve traditional furniture making skills and/or more modern and automated systems of production. However produced, the product is to be understood to be an item of furniture.

SVQs in Furniture 249 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Clients The person(s), organisation(s) or department(s) either

inside or outside your organisation for whom you are providing a service.

Product or process What needs to be produced for the client to meet their requirements, as detailed in the specification. May be any item of furniture to be produced on a commercial basis.

Formats The appropriate methods of presenting the information.

Information systems Where the specification information is recorded.

Regulations and guidelines To include all relevant company policy and health, safety and environmental legislation.

Specifications The set of instructions which detail the work to be carried out.

SVQs in Furniture 250 November 2010

ELEMENT 358.1 Produce specifications for furniture products

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Produce a specification for the engineering product or process that meets the requirements of the client

2. Incorporate all necessary details into the specification

3. Ensure that the specification is capable of being implemented

4. Ensure that the specification complies with all relevant regulations and guidelines

5. Agree the specification with the client at appropriate points in the design process

6. Provide a suitable rationale for any requirements that cannot be achieved or any changes to the specification

7. Produce the specification in the agreed formats with the necessary supporting documents

8. Record the specification in the appropriate information systems

To do this you need to know:

a) the design principles and processes that apply to the furniture items being produced

b) the general and furniture item-specific principles and processes for furniture production that apply and how they affect the details to be included in the specification

c) the health and safety legislation, regulations and safe working practices and procedures that you are required to build into specifications, including those deriving from HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, and where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and risk control strategies that have been set by your organisation

d) what the legislative and regulatory frameworks are that govern furniture production, including the need for compliance with relevant national and international furniture standards

e) what the organisational procedures and systems are for creating, disseminating, storing and maintaining furniture specifications

f) what the organisational procedures are in relation to patents, copyright, and intellectual property issues

g) what information should be included in furniture specifications for different items of furniture, the conventions, units of measurement and terms used and preferred organisational formats

SVQs in Furniture 251 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 367: Construct upholstery foundations This Unit addresses the competence required to construct upholstery foundations. This involves:

selecting and applying suspensions that suit load bearing requirements

applying fillings and forming the shape of the item to be upholstered

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 367.1 Apply upholstery suspensions 367.2 Form the shape of upholstered items There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 252 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Conditions The conditions of the frame in terms of its size, the

security of any joints and any irregularities in the wood which might affect the attachment of the suspensions.

Fillings Fillings include traditional and wooden fillings such as fabrics, hair, fibres, felts, wadding, feather/down and foam.

Fixing methods The fixing methods covered by this Unit include stitching, tacking and stapling, using staple guns, upholstery tacks and hammers, upholstery needles and threads.

Problems Problems can arise in relation to the quality, application and positioning of the suspensions and/or in relation to the forming and securing of the fillings to produce the required shape. Problems can arise with edge formation where the scrim is incorrectly tacked or the stitches are of inappropriate tension.

Suspensions Webbings, double and single cone springs and spring units.

Specification The set of details which describe the work to be carried out, including the characteristics of the upholstery fillings to be used, the shape to be produced, what sort of deep-buttoning pattern and tension is to be produced, the number and size of buttons to be used, the area for buttoning and the type and dimensions of the item to be upholstered. Specifications may be written and/or presented in the form of a diagram with measurements.

Stitching Stitching is carried out to form the shape and hold fillings in place and also to form edges and contours.

Upholstery Upholstery is of scroll arms, deep-buttoned panels and squab cushions. Panels are of simple and complex shapes.

SVQs in Furniture 253 November 2010

ELEMENT 367.1 Apply upholstery suspensions

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check and confirm that the frame is of an appropriate type, dimension and condition for the upholstering to be carried out

2. Set aside any frames which are of unsuitable condition for upholstering

3. Select suspensions of a suitable type and quantity to meet the load bearing requirements of the item of furniture to be upholstered

4. Space and align the suspensions so that they provide sufficient support to accommodate the upholstery to be carried out

5. Secure the suspensions together as required to meet the load-bearing requirements of the item

6. Secure the suspensions in place using a type and size of fixing that is appropriate to the item and its specification

7. Where springs are being used, use a spring edge construction that is appropriate to the type of furniture, design and required edge detail

8. Make sure that the tensioning of the suspensions is adequate to provide the strength and rigidity of foundation needed by the specification

9. Work in ways that protect yourself and others from risk of injury

10. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems which arise

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

b) why it is important to check the condition of the frame before starting to apply suspensions and what factors would mean that a frame was unsuitable

c) what types of suspensions are used and for what purposes

d) what the principles are behind the spacing and alignment of suspensions

e) why suspensions may need to be secured to each other and the implications of not doing this

f) how to secure suspensions in place and which fixings to use for different types of suspension

g) why suspensions need to be tensioned and the implications of over and under-tensioning

h) what sorts of spring edge construction to use for different situations and why

i) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

j) what kinds of problems can arise with applying suspensions and how to correct them

k) what the current Furnishing Regulations require in terms of suspensions

SVQs in Furniture 254 November 2010

ELEMENT 367.2 Form the shape of upholstered items

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Select fillings that are of suitable quality for the upholstery to be carried out

2. Ensure that you have sufficient fillings to form the shape to the required dimensions

3. Where deep-buttoning is required, accurately mark the required locations on the ground work

4. Position and form the fillings to the required shape, density and depth

5. Secure the fillings in place using fixing methods which are suited to the type of filling and its location on the item of furniture

6. Make sure that stitchings are of the required length, tension, size and spacing to produce the results required and are securely finished

7. Make sure that your stitching accurately and evenly follows the frame line and the shape required for finished contour lines

8. Work in ways that protect yourself and others from risk of injury

9. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems which arise

10. Secure the undercover so that it lies smooth and even

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for upholstery

b) what sort of fillings are used in traditional upholstery and for what purposes

c) the handling requirements which apply to different sorts of materials

d) when and why deep buttoning is carried out and what implications this has for the way in which a shape is formed

e) what methods are used to fix fillings in place and when to use them

f) what the implications are of using insufficient fillings, or of applying them unevenly, and how to overcome problems these can cause

g) what the implications are of inappropriate tensioning of stitches and how to overcome problems this can cause

h) the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH Regulations, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control methods that have been set by your organisation

i) what the current Furnishing Regulations require in terms of the use of different upholstery fillings

j) why an undercover is used and how this is secured

SVQs in Furniture 255 November 2010

Commentary for Unit: 370 Complete complex production furniture This Unit addresses the competence required to complete contemporary production furniture that is of a high, bespoke or complex specification. A high skill level will be necessary to deal with work which presents particular challenges which may include difficult handling characteristics, fragility, high costs, curved work and/or splayed edges. This involves:

planning and preparation

interpreting information

selecting materials, components and equipment

curved work

repairs and modifications to items of furniture

checking quality There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 370.1 Plan and assemble components 370.2 Attach fittings and finish the assembly 370.3 Complete and check assemblies There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 256 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Components These may vary in size from complex, detailed and/or

delicate components to large, heavy items and/or items of an awkward shape or size. Components will differ according to the type of furniture and can include:

structural/framework

curved parts

splayed work

tapered and shaped components

internal components such as wine racks, hidden drawers

sliding doors

tambour door Components can be made from natural or man made materials. Doors may be flat or curved and surface or flush fitted. The types of drawers covered by this Unit are those with false fronts, fitted by hand, and which make use of mechanical runners.

Problems and faults Problems and faults may relate to quality and design issues, the use of materials, tools, equipment and/or components. Solving them will require communicating and coordinating with internal and external suppliers about lead times and other supply information or ordering replacement components/materials.

Repair Repairs may relate to any work that is done to put right any marks or defects highlighted, or modifications that alter the design. These could include

cutting in new pieces of laminate/veneer to repair chips or blemishes

reattaching loose laminate/veneer

filling or waxing with coloured materials to hide any blemishes

Materials Typical materials for assembling of furniture could include: wood composites (eg chipboard, laminates, MFC), softwoods, hard woods, metals, glass and man-made materials used in modern production furniture. Materials also covers: finishes (eg filler, silicone), adhesives, fixings (eg screws, nails, drawer runners, hinges, handles, bolts) and specialised fixtures and fittings.

Equipment Typical tools and equipment needed for the production of furniture would include

hand tools (eg sawing, sanding, screwing scraping)

powered tools (eg drilling, screwing, sawing, routering, sanding)

basic woodworking machinery

devices (eg. jigs, templates, cramps, measuring devices)

pneumatic or vacuum operated tools

SVQs in Furniture 257 November 2010

Information/Specification The specification for the assembly of furniture will have been obtained and agreed between yourself and colleagues. This may also include deciding and agreeing on other information such as suitable materials and fittings for use in the assembly. It should be written and/or involve drawings and work lists. It will typically detail:

the dimensions, construction and finishing of the furniture

resource requirements

time schedule

Health and Safety issues

design alterations This will also include manufacturer‟s information for components and fittings. In the context of this Unit, fitting tolerances to within +/- 1mm would be expected. Although specifications will usually be provided in written form or by diagrams a competent person should also be able to work from verbal instructions.

SVQs in Furniture 258 November 2010

ELEMENT 370.1 Plan and assemble components

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Comply with the specific Health and Safety legislation and follow official guidelines to maintain a safe working environment

2. Interpret and clarify the information relating to the design and where necessary make adjustments

3. Design and/or make accurate templates for complex designs

4. Sort, match and mark components, where necessary making any adjustments

5. Use approved safe handling techniques, following any special procedures for handling components

6. Deal with damaged and/or incorrect components and take the actions necessary to resolve any problems this causes with production

7. Select the correct components as specified and confirm their quality meets the company standards

8. Select the required tools and equipment to complete the assembly

9. Assemble components in a logical and safe sequence using appropriate fixing and joining materials

10. Make necessary adjustments to ensure that alignment of surfaces is to the required tolerances

11. Maintain effective communication with the supporting personnel, clearly specifying quality outcomes to be met

12. Ensure safe and effective working practices are followed at all times, in line with current health and safety legislation

To do this you need to know:

a) how to interpret work specifications, including the meaning of technical terms

b) the circumstances under which it would be necessary to make adjustments to designs and the extent of adjustment that might be necessary

c) how to correctly identify which measurements are required for the production of templates and cut outs

d) how to design and make accurate templates for complex designs

e) the specific health and safety issues associated with working in the workplace

f) the handling characteristics and properties of natural timber, wood composites, laminates, glass and stainless steel

g) how to recognise defects in wood and wood based products and the action to take to deal with this

h) safe handling techniques for components such as delicate or heavy components or items of an awkward size or shape

i) the range of joining and fixing materials available, their characteristics and suitability for the furniture assembly

j) the range of tools and equipment available, their operation and suitability for the furniture assembly

k) techniques for joining materials and potential problems with joining different materials

l) how to accurately measure, check and align in three dimensions

m) what sort of problems can occur with the assembly, such as equipment faults, and how would they be dealt with

SVQs in Furniture 259 November 2010

n) organisational work flow procedures

o) what your personal responsibilities and that of your team are towards health and safety and the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH regulations

SVQs in Furniture 260 November 2010

ELEMENT 370.2 Attach fittings and finish the assembly

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Finish the furniture which may involve cleaning, wiping glue joints, staining, filling

2. Use the correct techniques and materials to achieve the specification

3. Make good any assembly faults which need to be dealt with for the specified quality to be achieved

4. Carry out any repairs on marks and defects made during the manufacturing/fitting process

5. Accurately, measure, mark and position fittings to produce the required alignment adjusting as necessary to ensure that movement of fixed components is minimised

6. Accurately bore, cut or shape the item as necessary in preparation for the fastening of fittings

7. Ensure that fittings are firmly secured in place and lie square and true to the surface, according to the attachment method used

8. Ensure organisational procedures to minimise the risk of damage to components/workpieces are followed

9. Maintain effective communication with supporting personnel or colleagues, clearly specifying quality outcomes to be met

10. Where authority allows ensure safe and effective working practices are followed at all times, in line with current health and safety legislation

To do this you need to know:

a) how to interpret and pass on information on work specifications

b) the handling characteristics of natural timber, wood composites, glass, laminate, stainless steel

c) the working characteristics of natural timber, wood composites, glass, laminate, stainless steel

d) the tolerances expected and the level of accuracy required

e) the types of assembly fault that may arise and how to correct them

f) how to repair marks and defects

g) what fittings are appropriate for production furniture and the methods of attachment

h) how to accurately measure, mark and position fittings

i) how to check and adjust alignment and movement of components

j) what sort of faults may occur and how should they be dealt with

k) what your personal responsibilities and that of your staff are towards health and the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH regulations

l) what timescale have been agreed for the work

SVQs in Furniture 261 November 2010

ELEMENT 370.3 Complete and check assemblies

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Complete the work within the required time and to the required standard

2. Deal safely and effectively with any problems during the assembly

3. Make sure dimensions and construction of completed furniture are to the required quality standard/specification

4. Confirm that necessary legal and regulatory requirement are met in the completed assembly

5. Reinstate the work area ready for the next assembly

6. Complete and check required documentation

7. In line with current health and safety legislation, ensure safe and effective working practices are followed at all times,

To do this you need to know:

a) the time allowed for the completion of the work

b) what sorts of problems might arise and the appropriate action to take to deal with them

c) how you would check the assembly against specifications or drawings and make alterations as necessary

d) the quality standards required for the work and the procedures for checking quality of completed assemblies

e) legal and regulatory requirements applicable for the intended use of production furniture

f) how to reinstate the work area for the next assembly

g) what documentation is required and confirmed by the customer and how to complete it

h) what your personal responsibilities and that of your team are towards health and safety and the implications for your work of the HASAWA and COSHH regulations

SVQs in Furniture 262 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 371: Collect and research information to support furniture restoration and repair commissions This Unit addresses the competence required to research and pull together information needed to support restoration or repair commissions. This involves:

investigating the background to and requirements for a restoration or repair

identifying techniques and materials appropriate to the item

pulling information together as a resource

identifying sources of materials and expert support needed to complete a commission There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 371.1 Research the requirements of a commission 371.2 Source materials and support for a commission There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 263 November 2010

Scope statement The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Customer Customers for a restoration or repair may be private or

corporate (eg via a gallery, manufacturer or insurance company).

Restoration and repair The return of an item of furniture to its original condition. Restoration is typically used when referring to older, traditional or antique furniture; repair is used when referring to modern furniture. Restoration and repair commissions may be small scale (eg a small stool or chest) or large scale (eg because of the number of items to be restored, or because of the condition of the item, or because of the rarity/value of the item).

Sources of information Information sources would include documents (eg historical records, manufacturer‟s specifications), other people, and professional/trade organisations. Information sources may be accessed directly or electronically.

Specification The specification for a restoration or repair will include details on the following:

quality criteria to be met

budgetary limits

time scale for the work These will have been established when the commission to undertake a restoration or repair was agreed.

SVQs in Furniture 264 November 2010

ELEMENT 371.1 Research the requirements of a commission

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Identify and use reliable sources of information

2. Build up a complete and accurate picture of the original techniques and materials that would have been used in producing the item

3. Obtain accurate and up to date details of materials and techniques which can be successfully used to replace original features

4. Seek expert assistance on any aspects of the information you uncover which require clarification

5. Conduct a thorough investigation into likely problems associated with the commission

6. Identify effective and tested solutions to any potential problems you uncover

7. Keep a complete and accurate record of the information collected

To do this you need to know

a) what sources can provide valid and reliable information

b) why it is important to have a full understanding of the original production techniques and materials

c) what historical techniques and materials for furniture production are still in use today

d) why it is important to gather information on tried, tested and successful uses of modern materials and techniques and on solutions to potential problems

e) who to turn to for expert advice and assistance

f) what sort of problems are likely to be associated with a restoration or repair

g) why you should keep a record of your research and what it should contain

SVQs in Furniture 265 November 2010

ELEMENT 371.2 Source materials and support for a commission

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Obtain accurate details of the specification within which the commission is to be carried out

2. Identify potential suppliers of materials and services relevant to the commission

3. Conduct a fair and thorough assessment of the quality and costs associated with each supply source

4. Check and confirm that the required supplies can be available within the timeframe for the job

5. Identify the preferred suppliers for the restoration, so quality, cost and timings are optimised

6. Get customer agreement on action to take when there are difficulties in the availability of supplies which closely match quality, time and cost criteria

7. Keep an accurate and up to date log of material and service suppliers that could be useful for future commissions

To do this you need to know

a) what sources can provide valid and reliable information about suppliers

b) what sorts of supplies are needed for common restoration and repair commissions

c) why it is important to be fair and thorough in evaluating and balancing quality, cost and availability

d) why you should seek customer agreement when deciding how best to respond to difficulties

e) what sort of information to keep on suppliers and why this needs to be kept up to date

SVQs in Furniture 266 November 2010

Commentary for Unit 373:

Finish furniture by modern and traditional polishing

This Unit addresses the competence required to apply specialist finishes using either traditional or modern methods, this involves:

preparing for the finishing process

applying decorative effects or finishes either traditionally or using modern methods There are two elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 373.1 Prepare the finish for application 373.2 Apply specialist finishes There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 267 November 2010

Scope statement

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards.

Faults The kinds of faults which could occur to work-pieces prior to treating would include holes, bruising, splits, scratches, dents, and the presence of adhesives. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and dealing with faults which can be treated readily.

Finish This Unit covers finishes which may either be traditional or modern and could include specialist finishes and techniques.

Specialist finishes The kind of specialist finishes could include: metallic, textured, pearlescents, glitter, marble, antique effects, rolling, ragging, cobweb, Crackolac sparkle finish, hammer finish, patina, paint finishes, colour matching and tinting.

Materials Primers, fillers, sealers, basecoats, lacquers, thinners - they can be based on oil, water or mixed solvents. There may also be need for the use of stains and cleaning solvents.

Personal Protective Equipment This covers eye protection, gloves, overalls and respiratory equipment as well as barrier, cleansing and after-care creams.

Surface Surfaces may be solid wood, veneered or flat panels and curved work.

Surface defects Types of defects that may occur during application could include: uneven coat, nibs, holes, scratches, chips, dents, cracks, blisters and blemishes, blotching, runs streaks, orange peel and fish eye, incorrect curing times, chilling, blushing, flow-out. The person carrying out this role is responsible for identifying and dealing with faults.

Tools and equipment Tools and equipment could include: sanding blocks, scrapers, cleaning rags, sponges, abrasive papers, abrasive pads, steel wool, tak rags, masking tape, craft knives, filler knives, filters and hand-held spray guns, rubbers, and spray booths.

Workpiece The item to be treated as part of the finishing process may be a component, sub-assembly or assembly. The work-piece to be treated may be veneered, made of solid wood or of wood composite.

Work specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the preparations to be carried out and applying traditional and modern finishes. The specification will also detail the time within which the process must be completed and the personal protective equipment which should be worn. Specifications may be oral or written and may involve the use of diagrams and colour cards.

SVQs in Furniture 268 November 2010

ELEMENT 373.1 Prepare the finish for application

In carrying out this work you must:

1. organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep your work area tidy

2. make sure that you have the required work specification and that everything you need to achieve it is available

3. check the workpiece and accurately identify any faults that are present

4. apply the appropriate remedial treatment to any faults that are present

5. select the correct specialist finishing materials from the specification

6. ensure the specialist finishing materials are in date and there is the correct quantity to complete the task

7. make purchase request for specialist finishing materials where necessary

8. check the consistency of the specialist finishing materials

9. check on specifications requirements for quantity of specialist finishes

10. mix the specialist finishing materials to specification requirements

11. work in ways that prevent contamination of the finish

12. handle and store the specialist finishing materials in ways which protect it from damage in line with the current regulations

13. ensure that all specialist finishing materials decanted are relabelled inline with the current regulations

14. dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures in line with the current regulations

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for modern and traditional polishing

b) what checks are carried out on workpieces which are being prepared for finishing

c) what sorts of faults can occur and how to recognise them

d) what remedial action to take to deal with different types of faults

e) what different preparations of specialist finishing materials are required to achieve the desired finish

f) the types of specialist finishing materials available in the industry

g) what process is used to ensure the correct purchase requirements are made at the correct time

h) how to check the viscosity of the specialist finishing materials

i) how to work out quantity requirements for specification

j) how to prevent contamination of specialist finishing materials

k) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

l) what are the labelling requirements for decanted specialist finishing materials

m) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 269 November 2010

ELEMENT 373.2 Apply specialist finishes

In carrying out this work you must:

1. ensure the work area is to correct standard before the application process, to reduce the risk of contamination

2. ensure the correct tools and equipment is prepared ready for use

3. ensure that ventilation levels are adequate before working with specialist finishing materials

4. make sure that surfaces are clean and free of excess materials and surface irregularities before work begins, between multiple coats and on completion

5. ensure the specialist finishes are correctly prepared to specification

6. choose the correct application technique for the specialist finishes

7. apply the specialist finishes uniformly to the required build and depth of colour

8. adjust your technique as necessary to achieve the required finish

9. check surface against specification requirements

10. deal promptly with faults which occur during the application process

11. allow specified drying times between multiple coats

12. make sure that unused materials are accurately labelled and return them to the designated storage areas

13. dispose of wastes safely using designated procedures in line with the current regulations

14. transfer the finished workpiece to the designated storage location

15. complete the process within the required time

16. complete production records accurately and clearly

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for materials used in making hand-crafted furniture

b) the different types of materials used, what each is for and when it is used

c) what the drying times are of different materials and why it is important to allow these to lapse before applying additional coats

d) how and why variations in application techniques influence the results produced

e) what kinds of faults can occur in the application of coatings and what steps can be taken to deal with them

f) the implications for your work of the HASAWA, COSHH Regulations and the Environmental Protection Act, including where to find out about relevant risk assessment details and control measures that have been set by your organisation

g) what personal protective equipment should be worn when handling specialist finishing materials and why

h) why it is important that waste materials, including rags, are disposed of safely

i) what information is recorded on production records and why it is important that these are kept up to date and accurate

j) work rates that you are expected to meet

SVQs in Furniture 270 November 2010

Unit 380: Monitor and maintain a healthy and safe working environment

UNIT OVERVIEW

This Unit is for:

you whilst you are at work. This Unit is about:

monitoring and maintaining a healthy and safe working environment by ensuring that your own actions do not create any health and safety risks. It is also about ensuring that any others under your supervision are conversant with and are working in accordance with the method statement and appropriate risk assessment. It involves identifying hazards in your work location. It is about dealing with such hazards and also recognising where you cannot deal with a hazard yourself and reporting it promptly to the responsible person. This Unit is also about acting responsibly to reduce wastage and energy consumption. It is about ensuring that the work you do is performed efficiently, optimising the use of resources and using sustainable working practices.

This Unit has no elements

SVQs in Furniture 271 November 2010

Unit 380 - Monitor and maintain a healthy and safe working environment

KEY WORDS AND PHRASES

These are DEFINITIONS and EXPLANATIONS of key words and phrases used in this Unit. The items

in the lists below are NOT meant to be exhaustive or items in range.

The Health and Safety Executive (HSE) is the body appointed to support and enforce health and safety law. They have defined hazard and risk as follows:

Emergency

this includes: fire, explosions, toxic fumes, electrical shocks.

Hazard a hazard is “anything that can cause harm".

Method Statements

employers are required to ensure so far as is reasonably practicable the provision of a “safe system of work” which is aligned to the size and/or complexity of the work to be done. It shall show the means by which the work will be carried out.

Personal Protective Equipment

personal protective equipment (PPE) is all equipment (including clothing affording protection against the weather) which is provided by the company and is intended to be worn or held by a person at work to protect against one or more risks to their health or safety. Examples of which are safety helmets, goggles, gloves, eye protection, high-visibility clothing, safety footwear and safety harnesses. Workers should be properly trained in the use of PPE.

Responsible person this will be the person who is responsible for you and your work in the workplace.

Risk

a risk is “the likelihood or chance, high or low, that somebody will be harmed by the hazard ".

Risk Assessment

it is a legal requirement that the risks in the workplace have been assessed. It requires making decisions about hazards, whether they are significant and covered with satisfactory precautions to reduce the risk. It shall include details of the provision of personal protective equipment (see above), workplace/site layout, access, how falls of materials shall be prevented etc.

Working environment

this refers to the type of work location. The working environment is something you would not be able to change.

Working conditions

this refers to the working conditions which exist at that point in time when the work is due to take place. They can vary. It could be, for example, that the work is to take place outside, in which case you may need to take account of the weather conditions.

Working practices:

this includes: activities, procedures, use of materials or equipment and working techniques used in carrying out your job.

SVQs in Furniture 272 November 2010

Unit 380 - Monitor and maintain a healthy and safe working environment

Important Guidance regarding Health and Safety:

According to the Health and Safety at Work Act: Employers must safeguard so far as is reasonably practicable, the health, safety and welfare at work of all the people who work for them and “other persons”. This applies in particular to the provision and maintenance of safe plant and systems of work, and covers all machinery, equipment and substances used. Employees also have a duty under the Act to take reasonable care to avoid harm to themselves or to others by their working practices, and to co-operate with employers and others in meeting statutory requirements. The Act also requires employees not to interfere with or misuse anything provided to protect their health, safety or welfare in compliance with the Act.

There is an array of health and safety regulations and codes of practice which affect people at work. There are regulations for those who, for example, work with electricity, eg the Electricity at Work Regulations, 1989, or work on construction projects, as well as regulations covering noise at work, personal protective equipment, manual handling, working with VDUs, or dealing with substances hazardous to health, etc. The specific requirements for all or any of these can be obtained from HSE local offices. The phrase "the legal responsibilities for health and safety as defined by any specific legislation covering your job role" is intended to relate to those specific pieces of legislation important to your workplace and/or activities which you should be able to find out about.

The Health and Safety at Work Act 1974 is the main piece of legislation under which nearly all the other regulations are made. It is for this reason that only this piece of legislation is specifically referred to in this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 273 November 2010

Unit 380 - Monitor and maintain a healthy and safe working environment

PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES – what you must do

You must ensure that:………….. 1. you identify which workplace health and safety procedures are relevant to the work location and

working environment 2. you identify those aspects of the risk assessment and method statement which will impact on you,

your work and others in your workplace 3. you inform others of the aspects of the risk assessment and method statement which will impact on

them 4. you review current working practices and those of others for hazards which could cause harm 5. the resources used in your work are optimised to minimise wastage and energy consumption 6. you control those health and safety hazards within your capability and job responsibility limits

77.. you report to the persons responsible for health and safety in the workplace, those hazards which you cannot control and which may present a risk to yourself and others

8. where you are supervising others, their conduct around the workplace does not endanger their

health and safety or other persons 9. you follow the workplace policies and manufacturers‟ instructions for the safe use of tools, plant and

equipment 10. you follow sustainable working practices that aim to reduce risks to health, safety and the

environment 11. you follow agreed work location procedures in the event of an emergency and in the event of injury

to self or others 12. within the limits of your responsibility, confirm that everyone uses personal protective equipment as

required in the risk assessment and treats it properly

SVQs in Furniture 274 November 2010

Unit 380 - Monitor and maintain a healthy and safe working environment

KNOWLEDGE REQUIREMENTS:

In order to monitor and maintain a healthy and safe working environment you should know and understand the following aspects relating to: Health and Safety

a. the legal duties of employers and employees for health and safety in the workplace as defined by the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974

b. the duties for health and safety as defined by any specific legislation covering your job role,

for example, EAWR, CoSHH, etc.

c. what hazards may exist in your workplace

d. the role and importance of risk assessments and method statements and the importance of conveying that to others on which they will impact

e. the particular health and safety risks which may be present in your job role and any others

for whom you are responsible

f. the important of using sustainable working practices g. the importance of remaining alert to the presence of hazards in the whole work place and

in your specific work location

h. agreed workplace health and safety procedures o including site evacuation procedures o procedures for dealing with injured persons o emergency procedures

i. responsibilities for your health and safety and that of any others for whom you are

responsible in your job description

j. the responsible person(s) to whom to report health and safety matters

k. the different types of personal protective equipment, when they should be used and the importance of taking proper care of items for which you are responsible

SVQs in Furniture 275 November 2010

Unit 381: Produce advanced bed treatments to include producing a fitted valance and decorative bedspread

This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare components and produce a standard bed treatment. This involves:

measuring and cutting fabric to make a fitted valance and decorative bedspread

sewing the components to make a fitted valance and decorative bedspread

trimming and finishing the fitted valance and decorative bedspread

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 381.1 Prepare components for an advanced bed treatment 381.2 Sew an advanced bed treatment 381.3 Finish an advanced bed treatment There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 276 November 2010

Scope statement

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Components The pieces of material from which an advanced bed

treatment is fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. Examples of sewing method could include straight, shaped sews and seams involving simple pleating.

Fabrics The different forms of material used for making bed treatments. These include a range of different fabric, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics with a minimum pattern repeat of 25cm, plain and patterned pile, flat weave fabrics.

Fixing methods This Unit covers the use of hand sewing, including slip stitch, ladder stitch and hemming stitch. Machine sewing including flat, french and flat fell seams. Gluing, tacking and stapling where appropriate.

Problems In relation to the cutting of fabrics, these will be to do with flaws, distortions and colour/pattern variations in the fabric, inaccurate measurements and mis-alignments. In relation to the assembly and sewing process, these will be to do with slipping, fraying, inaccuracies, poor seam quality and equipment faults. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rectifying these types of problems in ways which ensure that the quality of the outcome is not compromised.

Sewing This Unit covers both machine and hand sewing. Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be

carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material cutting and shaping accuracy is to within +/- 5mm, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting

component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm

Trimmings and Decorative Finishes This Unit covers the assembly and/or fixing of piping, braids, fringes, cords, flange cords and braids, applied and inserted into seams, hand and machine sewn. This Unit also includes the use of other decorative detailing, eg pleating, gathering, appliqué, tucks, smocking and skirts.

Tools and equipment This Unit covers the use of cutting equipment, measuring and marking equipment and both hand sewing equipment including scissors, pins, needles, thread, tailor‟s chalk, and sewing machines.

SVQs in Furniture 277 November 2010

ELEMENT 381.1 Prepare components for producing advanced bed treatments

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep the work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

3. Plan the cutting of the fabric so as to minimise waste and take account of the design characteristics and handling implications of the fabric to be used

4. Measure and mark out the components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits for the fabric being used

5. Ensure fabric placement and alignment is appropriate for the type and number of components required and the fabric characteristics

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

7. Follow safe working procedures when using sharp tools and items of equipment

8. Protect the fabric from damage while it is being worked on

9. Make sure that the components are clearly and accurately marked where necessary

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of technical terms used in specifications, and how to interpret specifications

b) how to take account of design characteristics such as pattern repeats and pile direction in planning and cutting

b) what type of markers to use and how to mark the material clearly and accurately

c) the handling characteristics of different materials and how this can affect their behaviour during positioning and fixing

d) why the sequence in which components are attached is important to the efficiency of the process and the quality of the outcome achieved

e) which sewing method to use in each stage of the specification

f) why it is important to protect the material from damage while it is being worked on

g) what sort of problems may arise and how to deal with them, and who to report to if the problem cannot be solved and/or it is not your responsibility

h) when and why to carry out checks to confirm that there are no sharp or protruding fixings

i) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

j) your personal responsibilities with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 278 November 2010

ELEMENT 381.2 Sew an advanced bed treatment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately place all materials and components in their correct position

2. Make sure that components are correctly orientated and aligned to meet fabric, pattern and design requirements

3. Attach the components in an efficient sequence.

4. Use sewing methods which are appropriate to the type of component

5. Attach the components together securely and to the required shape and finish

6. Check and confirm that there are no loose threads on the finished bed treatment

7. Check and confirm that the visual appearance of the bed treatment meets the specification

8. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

9. Follow safe working practices when using fixing tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different fabrics and how this can affect their behaviour during positioning and fixing

b) why the sequence in which components are attached is important to the efficiency of the process and the quality of the outcome achieved

c) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

d) when and why to carry out checks to confirm that there are no sharp or protruding fixings

e) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

f) your personal responsibility with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 279 November 2010

ELEMENT 381.3 Finish advanced bed treatments

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need to complete the specification

2. Check that you have the required finishing specification and that it is complete

3. Assemble components using appropriate method

4. Attach components using appropriate fixing method

5. Accurately position any finishings to give the required visual appearance including decorative finishes according to design specification

6. Securely attach the decorative finishings using methods which will give the required durability and appearance

7. Follow an efficient sequence when applying decorative finishings

8. Make sure that there are no loose ends or visible stitching

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working procedures at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) what sorts of trimmings and decorative finishings are used in bed treatments and why

b) when and why different fixing methods are used for bed treatments

c) terms used in technical specifications for bed treatments

d) why the sequence in which the components are attached is of importance to the appearance of the finished bed treatment

e) how to make sure that patterns and spacing of decorative finishings are accurate and what role the sequence of application plays in that

f) that appropriate lining fabric is used where appropriate

g) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

h) who to report to with unsolvable problems

i) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 280 November 2010

Unit 382: Produce complex shaped cushions and padded items This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare components and produce complex shaped cushions and padded items. This involves:

measuring and cutting fabric to make box complex shaped cushions and padded items

sewing the components to make complex shaped cushions and padded items

trimming and finishing the complex shaped cushions and padded items

have an understanding of the Furniture & Furnishings (Fire)(Safety) Regulations 1988

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety

There are four elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 382.1 Prepare components for complex shaped cushions and padded items 382.2 Sew complex shaped cushions and padded items 382.3 Finish complex shaped cushions and padded items 382.4 Understand the Fire Regulations There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 281 November 2010

Scope statement

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Components The pieces of material from which complex shaped

cushions and padded items are fashioned by sewing. Examples of sewing method could include straight, shaped sews and seams involving simple pleating. Components will include deep cushion pad or foam cut to appropriate design and size that comply with the UK Fire Regulations.

Fabrics Fixing methods

The different forms of material used for complex shaped cushions and padded items. These include a range of different fabric, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics with a minimum pattern repeat of 25cm, plain and patterned pile, flat weave fabrics. This Unit covers the use of hand sewing, including slip stitch, ladder stitch and hemming stitch. Machine sewing including flat and flat fell seams.

Problems In relation to the cutting of fabrics, these will be to do with flaws, distortions and colour/pattern variations in the fabric, inaccurate measurements and mis-alignments. In relation to the assembly and sewing process, these will be to do with slipping, fraying, inaccuracies, poor seam quality and equipment faults. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rectifying these types of problems in ways which ensure that the quality of the outcome is not compromised.

Sewing This Unit covers both machine and hand sewing. Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be

carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material cutting and shaping accuracy is to within +/- 5mm, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting

component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm

Trimmings and Decorative Finishes Closures

This Unit covers the assembly and/or fixing of piping, braids, fringes, cords, flange cords and braids, applied and inserted into seams, hand and machine sewn. This Unit also includes the use of other decorative detailing, eg pleating, gathering, frills, appliqué, tucks, smocking. This Unit covers the assembly and/or fitting of various closures, eg zips, buttons, tabs, ties, hooks & eye, placket openings

Tools and equipment This Unit covers the use of cutting, measuring and marking equipment and both hand sewing equipment including scissors, pins, needles, thread, tailor‟s chalk, sewing machines, and foam cutting equipment.

Fire Regulations This Unit requires an understanding of the UK‟s Fire Regulations with regard to domestic upholstered furniture, including cushions.

SVQs in Furniture 282 November 2010

ELEMENT 382.1 Prepare components for making complex shaped cushions and padded items

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep the work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

3. Plan the cutting of the fabric so as to minimise waste and take account of the design characteristics and handling implications of the fabric to be used

4. Measure and mark out the components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits for the fabric being used

5. Ensure fabric placement and alignment is appropriate for the type and number of components required and the fabric characteristics

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

7. Follow safe working procedures when using sharp tools and items of equipment

8. Protect the fabric from damage while it is being worked on

9. Make sure that the components are clearly and accurately marked where necessary

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for complex shaped Cushions and padded items

b) the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials used complex shaped Cushions and padded items

c) how many measurements and of which dimension are needed to ensure accurate cutting and fitting in respect of different types of component

d) which markers are most appropriate to use for different types of fabric

e) what cutting tolerances are appropriate for different types of component and in what ways this may be influenced by fabric type

f) what the implications are of not properly placing and aligning fabric before cutting it

g) why it is important to minimise waste

h) how to take account of design characteristics such as pattern repeats and pile direction in planning cutting

i) the sorts of problems that can occur during marking out and cutting fabric and how to deal with them

j) the functions and uses of the different types of measuring and marking tools

k) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

l) what steps should be taken to protect fabric from damage

m) the requirements of the Fire Regulations relating to cushions on domestic upholstered furniture

n) fabric compositions in relation to the fire regulations

SVQs in Furniture 283 November 2010

ELEMENT 382.2 Sew complex shaped cushions and padded items

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately place all materials and components in their correct position

2. Make sure that components are correctly orientated and aligned to meet fabric, pattern and design requirements

3. Make sure all components are measured to design specification of desired complex shaped cushion or padded item

4. Ensure use of fire safe cushion pad materials at all times

5. Attach the components in an efficient sequence

6. Use sewing methods which are appropriate to the type of component

7. Attach the components together securely and to the required shape and finish

8. Fit closure components if required and by appropriate method

9. Check and confirm that there are no loose threads on the finished complex shaped cushions and padded items

10. Check and confirm that the visual appearance of the complex shaped cushions and padded items meets the specification

11. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

12. Follow safe working practices when using tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different fabrics and how this can affect their behaviour during positioning and sewing

b) why the sequence in which components are attached is important to the efficiency of the process and the quality of the outcome achieved

c) when and why various methods of closures are used

d) when and why sorts of sewing methods are used

e) how different trimmings and decorative finishes are applied

f) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

g) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

h) your personal responsibility with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 284 November 2010

ELEMENT 382.3 Finish complex shaped cushions and padded items

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need to complete the specification

2. Check that you have the required specification and that it is complete

3. Assemble components using appropriate method

4. Attach components using appropriate sewing methods

5. Accurately position any closures, trimmings or decorative finishes to give the required visual appearance

6. Securely attach the closures, trimmings or decorative finishes using methods which will give the required durability and appearance

7. Make sure that there are no loose ends or visible stitching

8. Follow an efficient sequence when applying closures, trimmings or decorative finishes

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working procedures at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) what sorts of trimmings and decorative finishes are used in loose covers and why

b) when and why different closures are used for producing complex shaped cushions and padded items

c) terms used in technical specifications for complex shaped cushions and padded items

d) why the sequence in which the components are attached is of importance to the appearance of the finished complex shaped cushions and padded items

e) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

f) who to report to with unsolvable problems

g) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 285 November 2010

ELEMENT 382.4 Understand the Fire Regulations

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Carry out the work required in order that the finished cushions and padded items comply with the Furniture & Furnishings (Fire) (Safety) Regulations 1988

2. Understand the fabric composition of various fabrics

3. Check and confirm that the fabric choice of the cushions and padded items meets the specification and requirements of the regulations

4. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

5. Follow safe working practices when using tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the implications and legal requirements of the Furniture & Furnishings (Fire) (Safety) Regulations 1988

b) the meaning of technical terms used in relation to the fire regulations

c) the composition and characteristics of different fabrics and how this applies to the fire regulations

d) the difference between a fire retardant calico and a fire retardant interline/barrier cloth

e) when and what types of fabrics can be used with a fire retardant interline/barrier cloth

h) the cleaning, care and labelling requirements of various fabrics used to make box T-shaped cushions and padded items

f) the implications of various trimmings in relation to the fire regulations

g) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

h) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

i) your personal responsibility with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 286 November 2010

Unit 383: Produce advanced loose covers This Unit addresses the competence required to prepare components and produce an advanced loose cover. This involves:

measuring and cutting fabric to make an advanced loose cover

sewing the components to make an advanced loose cover

trimming and finishing the loose cover

have an understanding of the Furniture & Furnishings (Fire)(Safety) Regulations 1988

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are four elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 383.1 Prepare components for an advanced loose cover 383.2 Sew an advanced loose cover 383.3 Finish an advanced loose cover 383.4 Understand the Fire Regulations There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 287 November 2010

Scope statement

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Item to be covered The item to be covered should include an upholstered

armchair. Components The pieces of material from which a loose cover is

fashioned by sewing and other fixing methods. Examples of sewing method could include straight, shaped sews and seams involving simple pleating.

Fabrics Fixing methods

The different forms of material used for loose covers. These include a range of different fabric, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics with a minimum pattern repeat of 25cm, plain and patterned pile, flat weave fabrics. This Unit covers the use of hand sewing, including slip stitch, ladder stitch and hemming stitch. Machine sewing including flat, french and flat fell seams.

Problems In relation to the cutting of fabrics, these will be to do with flaws, distortions and colour/pattern variations in the fabric, inaccurate measurements and mis-alignments. In relation to the assembly and sewing process, these will be to do with slipping, fraying, inaccuracies, poor seam quality and equipment faults. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rectifying these types of problems in ways which ensure that the quality of the outcome is not compromised.

Sewing This Unit covers both machine and hand sewing. Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be

carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material cutting and shaping accuracy is to within +/- 5mm, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting

component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm

Trimmings and Decorative Finishes Closures

This Unit covers the assembly and/or fixing of piping, braids, fringes, cords, flange cords and braids, applied and inserted into seams, hand and machine sewn. This Unit also includes the use of other decorative detailing, eg pleating, gathering, appliqué, tucks, smocking and skirts. This Unit covers the assembly and/or fitting of various closures, eg zips, buttons, tabs, ties, hooks & eye, placket openings

Tools and equipment This Unit covers the use of cutting, measuring and marking equipment and both hand sewing equipment including scissors, pins, needles, thread, tailor‟s chalk, and sewing machines.

Fire Regulations This Unit requires an understanding of the UK‟s Fire Regulations with regard to domestic upholstered furniture, including the use of loose and stretch covers and the fabrics they are made of.

SVQs in Furniture 288 November 2010

ELEMENT 383.1 Prepare components for an advanced loose cover

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the materials, tools and equipment you will need so that you can work effectively and keep the work area tidy

2. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

3. Plan the cutting of the fabric so as to minimise waste and take account of the design characteristics and handling implications of the fabric to be used

4. Measure and mark out the components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits for the fabric being used

5. Ensure fabric placement and alignment is appropriate for the type and number of components required and the fabric characteristics

6. Deal promptly and effectively with any problems that occur

7. Follow safe working procedures when using sharp tools and items of equipment

8. Protect the fabric from damage while it is being worked on

9. Make sure that the components are clearly and accurately marked where necessary

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of terms used in technical specifications for loose covers

b) the handling and cutting characteristics of different types of materials used in loose covers

c) how many measurements and of which dimension are needed to ensure accurate cutting and fitting in respect of different types of component

d) which markers are most appropriate to use for different types of fabric

e) what cutting tolerances are appropriate for different types of component and in what ways this may be influenced by fabric type

f) what the implications are of not properly placing and aligning fabric before cutting it

g) why it is important to minimise waste

h) how to take account of design characteristics such as pattern repeats and pile direction in planning cutting

i) the sorts of problems that can occur during marking out and cutting fabric and how to deal with them

j) the functions and uses of the different types of measuring and marking tools

k) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

l) what steps should be taken to protect fabric from damage

m) the requirements of the Fire Regulations relating to loose and stretch covers on domestic upholstered furniture

n) fabric compositions in relation to the fire regulations

SVQs in Furniture 289 November 2010

ELEMENT 383.2 Sew an advanced loose cover

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Accurately place all materials and components in their correct position

2. Make sure that components are correctly orientated and aligned to meet fabric, pattern and design requirements

3. Attach the components in an efficient sequence

4. Use sewing methods which are appropriate to the type of component

5. Attach the components together securely and to the required shape and finish

6. Attach lining component if required by appropriate method

7. Fit closure components if required and by appropriate method

8. Check and confirm that there are no loose threads on the finished loose cover

9. Check and confirm that the visual appearance of the loose cover meets the specification

10. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

11. Follow safe working practices when using tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the handling characteristics of different fabrics and how this can affect their behaviour during positioning and sewing

b) why the sequence in which components are attached is important to the efficiency of the process and the quality of the outcome achieved

c) when and why different types of linings may be used in loose covers

d) when and why various methods of closures are used

e) when and why sorts of sewing methods are used

f) how different trimmings and decorative finishes are applied

g) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

h) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

i) your personal responsibility with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 290 November 2010

ELEMENT 383.3 Finish an advanced loose cover

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Organise the tools and equipment you will need to complete the specification

2. Check that you have the required specification and that it is complete

3. Assemble components using appropriate method

4. Attach components using appropriate sewing methods

5. Accurately position any closures, trimmings or decorative finishes to give the required visual appearance

6. Securely attach the closures, trimmings or decorative finishes using methods which will give the required durability and appearance

7. Make sure that there are no loose ends or visible stitching

8. Follow an efficient sequence when applying closures, trimmings or decorative finishes

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

10. Follow safe working procedures at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) what sorts of trimmings and decorative finishes are used in loose covers and why

b) when and why different closures are used for producing loose covers

c) terms used in technical specifications for loose covers

d) why the sequence in which the components are attached is of importance to the appearance of the finished loose cover.

e) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

f) who to report to with unsolvable problems

g) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 291 November 2010

ELEMENT 383.4 Understand the Fire Regulations

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Carry out the work required in order that the finished loose cover complies with the Furniture & Furnishings (Fire) (Safety) Regulations 1988

2. Understand the fabric composition of various fabrics

3. Check and confirm that the fabric choice of the loose cover meets the specification and requirements of the regulations

4. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise

5. Follow safe working practices when using tools and equipment

To do this you need to know:

a) the implications and legal requirements of the Furniture & Furnishings (Fire) (Safety) Regulations 1988

b) the meaning of technical terms used in relation to the fire regulations

c) the composition and characteristics of different fabrics and how this applies to the fire regulations

d) the difference between a fire retardant calico and a fire retardant interline/barrier cloth

e) when and what types of fabrics can be used with a fire retardant interline/barrier cloth

f) the cleaning, care and labelling requirements of various fabrics used to make loose covers

g) the implications of various trimmings in relation to the fire regulations

h) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

i) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

j) your personal responsibility with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 292 November 2010

Unit 384: Produce and install advanced window treatments This Unit addresses the competence required to plan, design, make, install and finish advanced window treatments. This involves:

liaising with the customer

planning the design, and assessing the implications of the specification to advanced windows, arched and shaped windows.

measuring and cutting material to make an advanced window treatment

sewing the components to make an advanced window treatment

trimming and finishing the advanced window treatment

sewing the components to make and install swags and tails

trimming and finishing swags and tails

working in ways which maintain your own and others‟ safety There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it:

384.1 Plan the design and evaluate requirements

384.2 Prepare components and sew an advanced window treatment

384.3 Finish, install and dress an advanced window treatment

There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 293 November 2010

Scope statement

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards.

Components The pieces of material from which a window treatment is fashioned By sewing and other fixing methods. Examples of sewing method should include straight, shaped sews and seams involving advanced techniques: hand-stitched headings; different types of blinds; swags and tails; arched windows; pelmets and valances.

Fabrics/materials The different forms of material used for making window treatments. These include a range of different fabric, including materials that require careful handing if an accurate cut is to be achieved and components properly aligned, eg patterned/striped fabrics with a minimum pattern repeat of 25cm, plain and patterned pile, flat weave fabrics.

Fixing methods This Unit covers the use of hand sewing, including slip stitch, ladder stitch and hemming stitch. Machine sewing including flat, french and flat fell seams. Gluing, tacking and stapling where appropriate.

Problems In relation to the cutting of fabrics, these will be to do with flaws, distortions and colour/pattern variations in the fabric, inaccurate measurements and mis-alignments. In relation to the assembly and sewing process, these will be to do with slipping, fraying, inaccuracies, poor seam quality and equipment faults. The person carrying out this role is responsible for rectifying these types of problems in ways which ensure that the quality of the outcome is not compromised.

Sewing This Unit covers both machine and hand sewing.

Customer requirement The requirements of the customer which need to be met, by the planning, design, making, installation and finishing of an advanced window treatment.

Specification The set of instructions which describe the work to be carried out, including details of the materials to be used including fabric size, colour, and type. The specification will also detail the quality of outcome to be achieved and the time within which it must be completed. In the context of this Unit, the outcome quality to be achieved requires that the following criteria be met:

material cutting and shaping accuracy is to within +/- 5mm, for both single-lay and multi-lay cutting

component marking is accurate to within +/- 3mm

Trimmings and finishings This Unit covers the assembly and / or fixing of tie backs, ropes and tassels, holdbacks, valances, pelmets and blinds.

Tools and equipment This Unit covers the use of cutting equipment, measuring and marking equipment and both hand sewing equipment including scissors, pins, needles, thread, tailor‟s chalk, and sewing machines.

SVQs in Furniture 294 November 2010

ELEMENT 384.1 Plan the design and evaluate requirements

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Obtain clear and complete details of the customer requirement

2. Make an accurate assessment of the types, qualities and quantities of material resources that will be needed to meet the customer requirement

3. Plan the design of the advanced window treatment taking into account the different properties of the materials needed

4. Complete the specification for the work which details the methods, materials and tools to be used accurately and completely

5. Confirm with the customer that the design is correct

6. Deal with any problems, reporting those which you cannot solve and/or are not your responsibility

7. Work safely at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) the steps, techniques, timings, skills, materials, tools and equipment that are needed to complete an advanced window treatment

b) why it is important to receive clear and accurate instructions on customer requirements

c) how many measurements and of which dimension are needed to ensure accurate planning of the design

d) how many measurements and of which dimension are needed to ensure accurate cutting and fitting in respect of different types of component

e) how to take account of design characteristics such as pattern repeats and pile direction when planning the design

f) how to produce a work specification for advanced window treatments

g) why it is important to gain customer approval during the planning and design stage

h) how to deal with typical problems and who to report problems to if you cannot solve them and/or they are not your responsibility

i) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 295 November 2010

ELEMENT 384.2 Prepare components and sew an advanced window treatment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Check that you have the required work specification and that it is clear and complete

2. Plan the cutting of the material so as to minimise waste and take account of the design characteristics and handling implications of the material to be used

3. Measure and mark out the components accurately, clearly and to within acceptable tolerance limits for the material being used

4. Protect the material from damage while it is being worked on

5. Make sure that components are correctly orientated and aligned to meet material, pattern and design requirements

6. Use sewing methods which are appropriate to the type of component and then attach the components in an efficient sequence

7. Check and confirm that the visual appearance of the advanced window treatment meets the specification

8. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise, reporting those that you cannot solve and/or are not your responsibility

9. Follow safe working practices at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) the meaning of technical terms used in specifications, and how to interpret specifications

b) how to take account of design characteristics such as pattern repeats and pile direction in planning and cutting

b) what type of markers to use and how to mark the material clearly and accurately

c) the handling characteristics of different materials and how this can affect their behaviour during positioning and fixing

d) why the sequence in which components are attached is important to the efficiency of the process and the quality of the outcome achieved

e) which sewing method to use in each stage of the specification

f) why it is important to protect the material from damage while it is being worked on

g) what sort of problems may arise and how to deal with them, and who to report to if the problem cannot be solved and/or it is not your responsibility

h) when and why to carry out checks to confirm that there are no sharp or protruding fixings

i) how to confirm that the outcome quality matches the specification

j) your personal responsibilities with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 296 November 2010

ELEMENT 384.3 Finish, install and dress an advanced window treatment

In carrying out this work you must:

1. Liaise with the customer and agree on a mutually convenient date and time, for installing, finishing and dressing the advanced window treatment

2. Organise the tools, equipment and materials you will need to complete the specification

3. Carry out any specified preparatory work at location

4. Check that you have the required finishing specification and that it is complete

5. Follow correct installation method to achieve the customer requirement

6. Maintain effective communication with the customer at all times

7. Follow an efficient sequence when applying any trimmings and finishings, using methods which will give the required durability, appearance and outcome quality

8. Check and confirm with the customer that the finished advanced window treatment meets their requirement

9. Deal effectively with any problems which may arise, reporting those which you cannot solve and /or are not your responsibility

10. Follow safe working procedures at all times

To do this you need to know:

a) why it is important to liaise with the customer, to agree a date and time for installation

b) terms used in technical specifications for advanced window treatments

c) how to interpret specifications and how to organise the equipment, tools and materials to achieve the customer requirement

d) what preparatory work may be required at location

e) when and why different fixing methods are used for advanced window treatments

f) why the sequence in which the components are attached is of importance to the appearance of the finished window treatment

g) how to make sure that patterns and spacing of methods of window finishings are accurate and what role the sequence of application plays in that

h) what methods of fixing will give advanced window treatments the appropriate strength for their purpose

i) the principles which underlie the positioning of hanging systems for stability and movement

j) why it is important to check and confirm that the finished item meets the customer‟s requirements

k) what sort of problems can arise and how to deal with them

l) who to report to with unsolvable problems

m) what your personal responsibilities are with regard to health and safety

n) how to dispose of waste in accordance with current legislation

SVQs in Furniture 297 November 2010

Unit 387: Evaluate and specify requirements for making soft furnishings

This Unit addresses the competence required to evaluate and specify the work to be done to prepare and finish soft furnishings. This involves:

assessing the implications of a specification

specifying methods, techniques, tools and materials to be used

proposing material purchases

taking account of health and safety implications There are three elements in this Unit, each of which has performance standards and a knowledge base associated with it. 387.1 Evaluate what is involved in fulfilling a piece of work 387.2 Produce a work specification 387.3 Propose material purchase to meet a specification There is also a scope statement which defines the coverage of this Unit.

SVQs in Furniture 298 November 2010

Scope statement

The following terms have a specific meaning in this Unit and are highlighted where they appear in the performance standards. Issues The kinds of issues that might arise in relation to meeting

work requirements could include lack of sufficient time, the need to transfer staff with the required skills between jobs and the knock-on effects of this, difficulties in obtaining the materials or carrying out the processes required to meet the original requirement which mean that design changes might be implicated.

Materials Materials include all types of fabric, threads, linings and filling materials.

Methods and techniques Refer to standard and specialised techniques within the different processes, eg stringing veneers, parquetry, stencilling, applying shellac and window treatments etc.

Personal Protective Equipment This covers eye protection, gloves, overalls and respiratory equipment as well as barrier, cleansing and after-care creams.

Processes Sewing processes to include hand and/or machine. Tools and equipment The hand tools and equipment used in soft furnishings

include scissors, pins, needles, bodkin, pinking shears, embroidery scissors, seam ripper, tape measure, tailor‟s chalk, set square and thread. Powered equipment such as sewing machine.

Work required A piece of work which has been commissioned and which requires one or a number of hand-crafted soft furnishing making processes to be used.

SVQs in Furniture 299 November 2010

ELEMENT 387.1 Evaluate what is involved in fulfilling a piece of work

In carrying out this work you must:

10. Obtain clear and complete details of the work required

11. Make an accurate assessment of the types, qualities and quantities of material resources that will be needed to meet the requirement

12. Make an accurate evaluation of the skill and knowledge base needed to carry out the techniques and methods involved

13. Accurately identify the types of tools and equipment that will be needed to meet the requirements

14. Accurately estimate the time that would be needed to achieve the requirements

15. Check and confirm the availability of required personnel, time, resources, tools and equipment and any constraints on their use for the piece of work in question

16. Identify technically suitable alternatives where requirements cannot be met in full

17. Bring any issues which arise from the requirements to the prompt attention of the appropriate person to deal with them

18. Agree which option is to be followed where choices are possible in the way in which the requirements are to be met

To do this you need to know:

j) the steps, techniques, timings, skills, materials, tools and equipment that are needed to conduct a range of soft furnishing processes

k) what kinds of skills and knowledge are needed to carry out different processes within soft furnishings

l) where appropriate the handling characteristics of different fabrics and fillings used in soft furnishings

m) typical time requirements for production of soft furnishings

n) why it is important to check the availability of different sorts of resources before committing to a piece of work

o) what sorts of constraints can arise and why these might interfere with the meeting of requirements

p) your personal responsibilities with regard to health and safety

SVQs in Furniture 300 November 2010

ELEMENT 387.2 Produce a work specification

In carrying out this work you must:

13. Clearly specify the outcome qualities which must be met

14. Be accurate in specifying measurements and tolerances

15. Use technical terms correctly

16. Specify appropriate processes, methods and techniques to achieve the required results

17. Specify appropriate tools and equipment for the work to be done

18. Clearly detail the type and quality of materials to be used

19. Detail suitable procedures to follow to comply with health and safety requirements

20. When appropriate specify appropriate personal protective equipment for the materials being handled and the tools and equipment to be used

21. Clearly detail the allowed time for each stage of the process and the overall deadlines within which it must be completed

22. Make sure that the specification is clearly and accurately recorded

23. Include examples and comparison standards as needed to provide an accurate specification of colour and finish requirements

24. Record and report the specification following organisational procedures

To do this you need to know:

i) conventions used in preparing work specifications and specifying measurements and tolerances for soft furnishings

j) the terminology used within soft furnishings

k) the uses of different methods, techniques and processes involved in making soft furnishings

l) different materials used within soft furnishings and what they are used for and why

m) the uses and descriptions of fixings, fittings and other attachments used in soft furnishings

n) your responsibilities with regard to health and safety

o) why it is of value to include examples such as colour boards, colour samples and other comparison standards when describing finishes and outcomes to be achieved

p) what personal protective equipment should be worn when handling different sorts of materials and using different types of tools and equipment, and why

SVQs in Furniture 301 November 2010

ELEMENT 387.3 Propose material purchases to meet a specification

In carrying out this work you must:

10. Accurately identify the materials that will be required to meet forthcoming work requirements

11. Check and confirm whether stock levels of required materials are sufficient to meet demand

12. Accurately and clearly specify the types and quantities of materials that need to be purchased to meet requirements

13. Agree on alternatives that fulfil the design specification where preferred materials cannot be supplied

14. Accurately identify where forthcoming work requirements mean that bulk purchases, and savings, can be made

15. Check and confirm that purchases are within budget before placing an order

16. Clearly specify delivery timescales that will mean that materials are in hand when needed

17. Make sure that the specifications are clear, complete and unambiguous before passing them on for processing

18. Submit material purchase specifications for processing through the correct organisational procedures

To do this you need to know:

j) stock control systems in use for different types of materials

k) the handling characteristics of different components/materials used in soft furnishings and how these affect their use

l) which materials/components could be used instead of the preferred ones

m) typical time requirements for production of soft furnishings

n) and understand the budgetary limits that apply to the specification

o) who is authorised to make changes to budgetary limits

p) supplier sales, ordering and delivery arrangements

q) what the procedures are for submitting purchase specifications for processing

r) why it is important to adhere to accurate purchase specifications